Automacao de Processos Catalogo

www.autonics.
com
PA Product Group
KRN100 Series
Features
•• Combined functions of paper recorder and paperless
recorder
•• Enables to print the saved data of inner memory
when running out of recording paper•
(data logger function)
•• Enables to set parameters with USB, RS485, Ethernet
communication
•• High legibility and setting convenient by graph LCD
•• High speed sampling of 25 ms, high speed record of
240 mm/H functions
•• 100 mm paper record (selectable 6 kinds of record
color)
•• Supports inner memory and USB memory data
backup (storage)
•• Supports several input up to 12 channels with slot
type input cards
•• Enables to select several option cards with slot type Please read “Caution for your safety” in operation manual
before using this unit.
output cards
•• Space saving for installation with compact design
(rear length: 168 mm)
•• Supports total 27 kinds of input types
•• Enables to order several type input cards (weight,
voltage, current, frequency, potential meter, etc)
Manual
•• For more information and instructions, refer to the user manual and the user manual for communication.•
Visit our web site (www.autonics.com) to download the manuals.
•• The user manual includes product specifications, functions, and operations.
•• The user manual for communication includes information about Modbus RTU protocol, Modbus TCP protocol, and Modbus map-
ping table.
Integrated device management program(DAQMaster)
•• DAQMaster is the integrated device management program to set parameters and manage monitoring data.
•• Visit our website (www.autonics.com) to download user manual and integrated device management program.
< Computer specification for using software > < DAQMaster screen >
Item Minimum requirements
System IBM PC compatible computer with Intel Pentium Ⅲ or above
Operating system Microsoft Windows 98/NT/XP/Vista/7
Memory 256MB or more
Hard disk More than 1GB of free hard disk space
VGA 1024×768 or higher resolution display
Others RS-232 serial port(9-pin), USB port
A-2
100mm Hybrid Recorder
Ordering information A. Recorder
Ordering information for recorder model B. Indicator
KRN100 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 S C. Converter
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨
D. Controller
Item Description
① Item KRN100 New 100mm Paper Type Recorder E. Thyristor
02 2-channel(KRN-UI2×1EA) unit
04 4-channel(KRN-UI2×2EA) F. Pressure
06 6-channel(KRN-UI2×3EA) transmitter
② Input channel
08 8-channel(KRN-UI2×4EA) G. Temp.
transmitter
10 10-channel(KRN-UI2×5EA)
12 12-channel(KRN-UI2×6EA)
H. Accessories
0 None
③ Digital input 1 6EA(KRN-DI6×1EA)
2 12EA(KRN-DI6×2EA)
0 None
④ Alarm transistor output 1 6EA(KRN-AT6×1EA)
2 12EA(KRN-AT6×2EA)
0 None
1 4EA(KRN-AR4×1EA)
⑤ Alarm relay output
2 8EA(KRN-AR4×2EA)
3 12EA(KRN-AR4×3EA)
0 None
1 3EA(KRN-24V3×1EA) KRN100
⑥ Transmitter power output 2 6EA(KRN-24V3×2EA)
3 9EA(KRN-24V3×3EA) KRN50
4 12EA(KRN-24V3×4EA)
0 None
⑦ Communication output
1 RS485/Ethernet/USB(KRN-COM×1EA)
⑧ Power voltage 0 100-240VAC, 50/60Hz
⑨ Case S Standard panel mounting type
Ordering information for input/output card
Type Model Function and number of channels Max. mountable cards Slot number
Universal input card KRN-UI2 Universal input 2-channel 6EA 1 to 6
Digital input card KRN-DI6 Digital input 6-channel 2EA
KRN-AR4 Alarm relay output 4-channel 3EA
Alarm output card
KRN-AT6 Alarm transistor output 6-channel 2EA 7 to 10※1
Transmitter
Transmitter power output card KRN-24V3 4EA
24VDC power output 3-channel
RS485 + USB + Ethernet communication
Communication output card KRN-COM 1EA C
output
※ 1. The digital input card, alarm output card, transmitter power output card are connectable up to 4EA as mixed.
Example of ordering
To use universal input 10-channel, digital input 4-channel, alarm relay output 5-channel, and RS485 communication output, it is
ordered as KRN100-10102-01-0S and the connected I/O card is as below.
•• KRN100(recorder): 1EA
•• KRN-UI2(universal input card): 5EA (universal input card 1EA is 2-channel and 5EA×2-channel = 10-channel.)
•• KRN-DI6(digital input card): 1EA
•• KRN-AR4(alarm relay output card): 2EA
•• KRN-COM(Communication output card): 1EA
A-3
KRN100 Series
Connections
Rear side of KRN100 standard model

This figure is the rear side of KRN100-04000-00-0S.
SOURCE
100-240VAC
50/60Hz, 55VA
Slot Description
1 to 6 Connects universal input card(KRN-UI2).
Connects digital input card(KRN-DI6), alarm output card(KRN-

7 to 10
AR4, KRN-AT6), transmitter power output card(KRN-24V3).
C Connects communication output card(KRN-COM).
I/O card
Universal input card [KRN-UI2] Digital input card [KRN-DI6]
UI2 DI6
-
+
-
+
※Each channel is isolated and dielectric strength is 500 V.
Alarm output card [KRN-AR4(relay output)] Alarm output card [KRN-AT6(transistor output)]
AR4 AT6
Inner Inner
250 VAC 3 A 1 a
※AL1,2,3 and AL4,5,6 are isolated.
Transmitter power output card [KRN-24V3] Communication output card [KRN-COM]
24V3 COM
24 VDC 30 mA
24 VDC 30 mA
24 VDC 30 mA
※24V output of 3EA is isolated individually.
A-4
Specifications A. Recorder
Series KRN100
B. Indicator
Power voltage 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage range 85 to 110% of rated voltage
C. Converter
Power consumption Max. 55 VA
LCD type STN Graphic LCD D. Controller
Resolution 320×120 Pixel
Screen
Adjusting brightness 4-level(OFF/Min/Standard/Max) E. Thyristor
unit
Backlight White LED, 2-level(Temp/Always)
Input channels 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 10 / 12-channel(2-channel/card)-Expandable F. Pressure
transmitter
Universal input ※1
Temperature sensor(RTD, thermocouple), analog
1 to 4-channel: 25 ms/125 ms/250 ms, 5 to 12-channel: 125 ms/250 ms G. Temp.
Sampling cycle (inner sampling cycle is operation unit time for average movement filter and alarm output function.) transmitter
※Max. sampling cycle for TC-R, U, S, T sensor is 50ms.
Recording period in graph mode 10, 20, 40, 60, 120, 240 mm/H H. Accessories
Storage cycle 1 to 3600 sec. (storage interval time to inner log file is 1 sec.)
Inner memory 512 MB
USB memory User purchased, recognizes max. 32 GB, enables to use cable up to 1.5 m
2500 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min. (power terminal and case)
Dielectric voltage ※Excepts USB Device and Ethernet
Vibration strength•
Vibration strength: 10 to 60 Hz 4.9 m/s2 (each of X, Y, Z axes for 1 hour)
(for convey and storage) and
Operating vibration: 10 to 60 Hz 1 m/s2 (each of X, Y, Z axes for 10 min.)
operating vibration
Insulated resistance Min. 20 MΩ(at 500 VDC megger)
Noise ±2kV the square wave noise (pulse width 1 ㎲) by the noise simulator
Time accuracy Within ±2min/year (enables to use up to 2100 year)
Mech- Ink cartridge Enables to normal print with going and returning printing max.5 times within 7 days after opening the unit
anism Ink dry time Max. 15 minutes KRN100
Protection IP40(for front panel)

Recording paper 113 mm×9 m KRN50
Environ- Ambient temperature 0 to 50 ℃, storage: -20 to 60 ℃ (without ink cartridge)

ment Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH, storage: 35 to 85% RH
Approval ,
Unit weight Approx. 1.7 to 2.0 kg
※ 1. For more information of universal input, please refer to 「I/O card」of the A-6 page.
※ 2. When using this unit in high humidity, it may cause paper jam. Please do not use this unit in high humidity.
※ Environment resistance is rated at no freezing or condensation.
Dimensions
18.6 (unit: mm)
144 168 137
137
144
137
Min.175
※ This rear side dimension is with in-
● Panel cut-out
stalled I/O cards to every slot.
138 +1.0
0
Min.175
※ Use a steel plate which is 2 to 8 mm thickness.

138 +1.0
0
A-5
KRN100 Series
I/O card
Type Model I/O specifications Descriptions
RTD JPt100Ω, DPt100Ω, DPt50Ω, Cu100Ω,Cu50Ω(supply current 420㎂)
Thermocouple B, C(W5), E, G, J, K, L, L(Russia), N, P, R, S, T, U
Input type※1
Voltage: ±60 mV ±200 mV ±2 V, 1-5 V, ±5 V, -1 V-10 V
Analog
Current: 0.00-20.00 mA, 4.00-20.00 mA
Voltage(V): Min. 150 kΩ
Universal input Input impedance RTD, Thermocouple, Voltage(mV): Min. 2 MΩ
KRN-UI2 Current: 51 Ω
card
RTD Warm-up time: Min. 30 min.
Room temperature (25 ℃±5 ℃): ±0.1%F.S ±1digit
Display
Thermocouple Out of room temperature range: ±0.2%F.S ±1digit
accuracy※2
For RTD, 500 to 800 ℃ is ±0.5%±1digit of PV value,
Analog For Thermocouple, below -100 ℃ is ±0.3%F.S.±1digit.
Resolution 16Bit
Non-contact input ON: Max. 1 V of residual voltage, OFF: Max. 0.1 mA of leakage current
Digital input card KRN-DI6
Contact input ON: Max. 1 kΩ, OFF: Min. 100 kΩ, Outflow current for short: Approx. 4 mA
Alarm Capacity 25 0VAC, 3 A, 30 VDC 3 A, 1 Form A (resistance load)

KRN-AR4 relay Mechanical: Min. 50,000,000 operations
Alarm output card output Life
Electrical: Min. 100,000 operations (3 A 250 VAC, 3 A 30 VDC)
KRN-AT6 Alarm transistor output NPN Open Collector, 12-24 VDC/30 mA Max.
Transmitter power 24±2 VDC, , total 3-channel, max. 3 0mA per 1-channel
KRN-24V3 Transmitter power output
output card built-in over-current protection circuit
Modbus RTU
RS485 ※Recommended to use shield cable over AWG24
Communication
KRN-COM Com. output
output card※3 EtherNet IEEE802.3(U), 10/100 BASE-T(Modbus TCP)
USB Device※4 USB V2.0 Full Speed(Device Control)
※1.To change input specification, you must turn OFF the power of KRN100, remove universal input cards, set inner jumper pins (please
refer to ‘ I/O card’ of the A-4 page) and re-connect it.
※ 2. Exception range for measuring accuracy by each sensor(accuracy after 30min warm-up time)
· R,S,C,G: 0≤T≤100±4.0 ℃,
· B: No regulation accuracy below 400 ℃
· U,T:-200≤T≤-100±3.0 ℃, -100≤T≤400±2.0 ℃,
· Cu50: -200≤T≤200±1.0 ℃
· DPt50: -200≤T≤600±1.5 ℃
※ 3. RS485, Ethernet communication output are not available at the same time.
※ 4.The front USB device is only for data backup and rear USB device is available only for parameter setting.
※ It is recommended to use shield cable to decrease noise when sensor input cable is longer.
※ If connecting or disconnecting input/output card when power is ON, it may cause malfunction.
To connect or disconnect input/output card, you must turn OFF the power.
A-6
Input type and range A. Recorder
Input range B. Indicator

Input type Display
℃ ℉ K
K(CA) TC-K -200.0 to 1350.0 -328.0 to 2462.0 73.2 to 1623.2 C. Converter
J(IC) TC-J -200.0 to 800.0 -328.0 to 1472.0 73.2 to 1073.2

E(CR) TC-E -200.0 to 800.0 -328.0 to 1472.0 73.2 to 1073.2 D. Controller
T(CC) TC-T -200.0 to 400.0 -328.0 to 752.0 73.2 to 673.2

E. Thyristor
B(PR) TC-B 100.0 to 1800.0 212.0 to 3272.0 373.2 to 2073.2 unit
R(PR) TC-R 0.0 to 1750.0 32.0 to 3182.0 273.2 to 2023.2
F. Pressure
S(PR) TC-S 0.0 to 1750.0 32.0 to 3182.0 273.2 to 2023.2 transmitter
Thermocouple
N(NN) TC-N -200.0 to 1300.0 -328.0 to 2372.0 73.2 to 2023.2
G. Temp.
C(TT)※1 TC-C 0.0 to 2300.0 32.0 to 4172.0 273.2 to 2573.2 transmitter
G(TT) ※2
TC-G 0.0 to 2300.0 32.0 to 4172.0 273.2 to 2573.2
L(IC) TC-L -200.0 to 900.0 -328.0 to 1652.0 73.2 to 1173.2 H. Accessories
L(Russian type) ※3
TC-L_R 0 to 600.0 32.0 to 1112.0 273.2 to 873.2
U(CC) TC-U -200.0 to 400.0 -328.0 to 752.0 73.2 to 673.2
Platinel Ⅱ TC-P 0.0 to 1350.0 32.0 to 2462.0 273.2 to 1623.2
Cu50Ω CU50 -200.0 to 200.0 -328.0 to 392.0 73.2 to 473.2
Cu100Ω CU100 -200.0 to 200.0 -328.0 to 392.0 73.2 to 473.2
RTD JPt100Ω JPT100 -200.0 to 600.0 -328.0 to 1112.0 73.2 to 873.2
DPt50Ω DPT50 -200.0 to 600.0 -328.0 to 1112.0 73.2 to 873.2
DPt100Ω DPT100 -200.0 to 850.0 -328.0 to 1562.0 73.2 to 1123.2
-60.00 - 60.00 mV ±60 mV Resolution: 10 ㎶
-200.00 - 200.00 mV ±200 mV Resolution: 10 ㎶
-2.000 - 2.000 V ±2 V Resolution: 1 mV
Voltage KRN100
1.000 - 5.000 V 1-5 V Resolution: 1 mV -99999 to 99999
Analog (display range depends on
-5.000 - 5.000 V ±5 V Resolution: 1 mV the decimal point position)
KRN50
-1.00 - 10.00 V -1 V-10 V Resolution: 10 mV
0.00 - 20.00 mA 0-20 mA Resolution: 10 ㎂
Current
4.00 - 20.00 mA 4-20 mA Resolution: 10 ㎂
※ 1. C(TT): Same as existing W5(TT) type sensor

※ 2. G(TT): Same as existing W(TT) type sensor
※ 3. Russian type L type temperature sensor is divided from general purpose L type.
※ When changing input type to voltage (over ±2 V) or current, set the jumper pin of KRN-UI2 (universal input card). Its factory de-
fault is temperature sensor input.
A-7
KRN100 Series
Part descriptions
Front and side part
⑤
①
④
②
① Display part: Displays measurement values as trend graph, bar graph, or digital number (1/8/12 channel).
Please refer to「Screen display」of the A-13p.
② Recording print part: Records measuring value of data by each channel with designated color.
③ Channel information part: Write the information by each channel.
④ Control key/Function key: Executes parameter setting and recording, and special function.
Key Function
Used for starting/stopping recording, changing input characters on virtual keyboard status, and displaying Function
key. Press this key for 3 sec. in stop state, the ink cartridge moves to the center.
(Use this key to replace the ink cartridge.)
Used for going out from parameter setting group or setting manual channel switch mode.
It also executes to release auto channel switch mode and printer list output (3 sec.) function.
Used for moving parameter in setting mode, setting manual channel switch mode and forced alarm reset (3 sec.).
Used for moving parameter in setting mode, increasing digit value, setting auto channel switch mode, and manual
feed function (by pressing over 3 sec.) in stop state.
Used for moving parameter in setting mode, decreasing digit value, changing display mode and executing manual
digital memo (3 sec.) in recording state.
Used for entering setting mode (3 sec.) and set value change mode.
⑤ USB port :Connects an USB memory. It recognizes max. 32Gbyte and if using cable, it is available up to 1.5m.
※ Function key:
Use this key to enter virtual keyboard in parameter setting.
Press the key and Function key appears on lower screen as below
figure. Press the , , , , key as below Function
key, it operates the appropriate Function key's operation.
<-Left Right-> Delete Cancel OK
Rear part
①
① Slot(C) for connecting communication output card(KRN-COM)
② Slot(7to10) for connecting digital input card(KRN-DI6), alarm relay output
card(KRN-AR4), alarm transistor output card(KRN-AT6), transmitter power output
card(KRN-24V3).
④ You can connect total 4EA by combining digital input card, alarm output card, and
transmitter power output card, as below combination example.
②
KRN-DI6 KRN-AR4 KRN-AT6 KRN-24V3
+ + + = Total 4EA
1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA
KRN-DI6 KRN-AR4 KRN-AT6
+ + = Total 4EA
2EA 1EA 1EA
KRN-DI6 KRN-24V3
+ = Total 4EA
1EA 3EA
③
③ Slot(1 to 6) for connecting universal input card(KRN-UI2)
④ Power connecting part (100-240VAC 50/60Hz)
※ Above the rear side image is connected every otuput card to help your understand.
A-8
Inside
A. Recorder
① ① Ink cartridge(model: D33006B-66X-01)
② Recording paper cassette B. Indicator
Cassette saves the recording paper.
② ③ Recording paper cassette lever
C. Converter
Press the lever down and this recording paper cassette is
removed from KRN100.
※ Remove the recording paper cassette for recording paper D. Controller
replacement, ink cartridge replacement.
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
③ transmitter
Paper cassette
① Recording paper holder G. Temp.
① ⑤
Movement holder of recording paper when recording transmitter
④ ② Recording paper storage part

Storage part for recorded recording paper H. Accessories
③ Front cover of recording paper storage

Open recording paper guide for recording paper replacement
④ New recording paper storage: Storage part for new
recording paper (1EA recording paper is storable.)
⑤ Rear cover of recording paper storage
②
③
Functions
Special function [ Special Function ] ٧٧Linear

KRN100
It displays the applied measuring value of the set special It applies lower limit scale and upper limit scale to lower
function. Depending on Input Type(Input specification), limit input value and upper limit input value and displays
applied special function is different. this values. KRN50
•• Set range : Ex) In case low limit input value: -5 V, high limit input
value: +5 V and in case lower limit scale: -1000,
- When input type(input specification) is temperature
upper limit scale: 1000, if current input value is 2 V,
sensor (thermocouple, RTD): None ↔ Difference
display value is 400.
-When input type(input specification) is analog (voltage,
current): Linear ↔ Root ↔ Square ↔ Two Unit
(Two Unit is displayed when Input Type (input ٧٧Root
specification) is set as 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA.) In case voltage, current input type, this mode is used
•• Factory default: None when input value is calculated by Root ( ) for the
desired display value. Differential pressure signal of
differential pressure flow meter is calculated Root ( )
٧٧Difference (deviation) for the to-be measured flux. This function is used to
It is available to set when Input Type(input measure flux by input value.
specification) is temperature sensor (thermocouple, Ex) In case lower limit input value: -5 V, upper limit
RTD). It displays the deviation of Reference Channel input value: +5 V and in case lower limit scale:
(Reference channel) measuring value. -1000, upper limit scale: 1000, if current input value
(Display value = standard channel measuring value - is 2 V, display value is approx. 673.32.
reference channel measuring value)
•• The set channel as analog (current, voltage) of ٧٧Square
Input Type (Input specification) is not able to set as
Reference Channel (reference channel). In case of voltage, current input type, this mode is
used when input value is calculated by square for the
•• I f there is no set reference channel, it displays
desired display value. Reverse of Root, flux signal is
standard channel measuring value.
calculated by square for differential pressure signal.
•• If any one of reference channel, or standard channel
Ex) In case lower limit range: -5 V, upper limit range: +5
is break (BURN), upper limit value (HHHH), lower
V and in case lower limit scale: -1000, upper limit
limit value(LLLL) status, it displays as correspond
scale: 1000, if current input value is 2 V, display
value. If you select the channel which is used
value is -20.
Difference function as reference channel, it displays
the value based on calculating actual measuring
value, not display value of reference channel.
A-9
KRN100 Series
٧٧Two Unit Standard record period [ Standard Period ]

For compound pressure, if input pressure is lower than Set record period to record current time, display value by
atmospheric pressure(0), it displays the degree of a channel as digital number on recording paper.
vacuum with mmHg unit. If input pressure is higher It is activated when Record Mode(Record mode) is Digital.
than or same as atmospheric pressure(0), it displays
positive pressure with kg/cm2 unit. •• Set range: 00m 01s to 99m 59s
When using Two Unit function, lower limit value is fixed Depending on the number of recording channels, min.
as -760 mmHg and kg/cm2 value is able to set within set range is limited as below.
set range 1 to 35. Record channel Set range
Two Unit limits scale point as 0 ↔ 0.0 ↔ 0.00 . When 1 to 2 01m 00s to 99m 59s
using Two Unit, display unit is automatically changed
3 to 4 02m 00s to 99m 59s
as mmHg or kg/cm2.
The calculation with Record Method (Data storage 5 to 6 03m 00s to 99m 59s
method) and Filter type (Input digital filter) is impossible 7 to 8 04m 00s to 99m 59s
and ignored due to different type of two unit value. 9 to 10 05m 00s to 99m 59s
•• S et range: 1 to 35 11 to 12 06m 00s to 99m 59s
•• Factory default: -
Ex) If pressure range is -760 mmHg to 3 kg/cm2, and •• Factory default: -
pressure transmitter outputs 4-20 mA, for 4 mA
input it displays -760 mmHg, 8 mA input is unit
Reservation record [ Reservation Type ]
changing point. For 20 mA input, it displays 3 kg/cm2.
This function is to set reservation time. At the set time, it
starts/stops recording automatically.
Record zone division [ Divide Zone ]
You can select reservation record either Repeat(repeat
Divides record zone for measuring value by channel. ON/OFF) or Single(single ON/OFF).
It divides equally max. 12 zones as equal value. User When selecting reservation record, ‘Reservation
needs to set record zone by channel in Record Zone Period(Reservation record period)’ and ‘Reservation
setting at Input Setup. Time(Reservation record time)’ are activated. When
It is easy to check measuring value due not to duplicated reservation record is set, the icon flashes with the
record zone with divided record zone by channel which is (recording) or the (stop recording) icon.
set in Record Zone setting at Input Setup.
The icon tuns OFF when reservation setting is ‘Disable’.
If there is too many division for record zone, record value
check accuracy is low. •• Set range: Disable ↔ Repeat ↔ Single
•• Factory default: Disable
•• Set range: None, 2 to 12
•• Factory default: None ٧٧Repeat (repeat ON/OFF)
Ex) SV of record zone division: None From start recording date to end recording date, it
records data at from the set start time to the set end
time.
٧٧Single (single ON/OFF)

Starts recording at the start set time on start date and
finishes recording at the end set time on end date.
File/Memory setup [ FILE/MEMORY SETUP ]

Ex) SV of record zone division: 5
You can set the parameter about parameter set file and
storage data. Move to FILE/MEMORY SETUP with the
, keys , press the key to enter FILE/
MEMORY SETUP.
٧٧Open parameter set file [ Load Set File ]

Applies set value of saved parameter set file.
When applying this set, backup data, user unit and
booting logo are not changed.
None, Default.pms file is activated and if there is
User1.pms to User5.pms, User1.pms(USB) to User5.
Summer time [ Summer Time ] pms(USB) file(parameter set save file), it is activated.
This function is for applying summer time (daylight saving •• Set range:
time) in specific countries and regions. None ↔ Default.pms ↔ User1.pms to User5.pms•
When you set Summer Time, it adds current time and 1 ↔ User1.pms(USB) to User5.pms(USB)
hour and displays the「(S)」mark in front of the date and •• Factory default: None
time on LCD screen or in front of the date on recording
paper.
•• S et range: Disable ↔ Enable
•• Factory default: Disable
A-10
※ Be sure that if selecting ‘Default.pms’ file, every Firmware upgrade

set value is initialized as factory default. Save the A. Recorder
current set parameter as Save Set File (parameter Upgrades KRN100 firmware.
setting file storage) at first and initialize it for the When upgrading firmware, parameters’ set values are
B. Indicator
provision. initialized.
※One file from User1.pms to User5.pms, User1.pms •• Set range: -
(USB) to User5.pms(USB) is selected, all parameter •• Factory default: Auto set C. Converter
setting information of KRN100 is changed as the set ※ During firmware upgrade, alarm output, digital input and
value of the selected parameter save file. log file save, etc functions does not operate normally. D. Controller
※ Set value changing may be also affected to every Therefore, please take proper measures to prevent
setting of KRN100’s overall operations. Check malfunction of KRN100 system before starting firmware
possible problems occurring on system and change upgrade. After completing firmware upgrade, you must E. Thyristor
unit
the desired set value. turn OFF and ON the power of KRN100 to operate
normally.
F. Pressure
٧٧Save parameter set file [ Save Set File ] ※ During firmware upgrading, when power turns OFF, transmitter
firmware upgrade is not complete. When power turns
Saves current set parameter set value to inner memory ON again, KRN100 operates with previous firmware G. Temp.
transmitter
or an external USB memory. version. Try firmware upgrade again.
When saving it to inner memory, it is saved in User1. ※ After completing firmware upgrade and OFF/ON the
H. Accessories
pms to User5.pms files or to an external USB memory, power, if KRN100 displays booting screen and does
it is saved in User1.pms (USB) to User5.pms (USB) not operate normally, it may have damage to the inner
files. (Activated only when an external USB memory is firmware during firmware upgrade. It is required to
connected.) repair
•• Set range:
None ↔ User1.pms to User5.pms, User1.pms(USB) Backup data record setting
to User5.pms(USB) [ RECORD BACKUP_ SETUP ]
•• Factory default: Select...
Record Backup creates file when power ON regardless
of starting/stopping record and saves the data to inner
٧٧USB storage function [ USB LogData Save ]
system memory (USB memory storage is available
Set whether to save backup data which is saved at (Enable) by the set.) according the set record mode.
system on an USB memory. This parameter is useful to print the desired time data with
When selecting Enable to saving data to USB memory, backup data or check data by computer with DAQ Master
it also saves data to system memory at the same time. (dedicated software).
Connected an USB memory at left side USB Slot, KRN100
Therefore, backup data set function is for printing the
KRN100 starts to save. It takes check time for storage saved backup data at inner system memory and USB
free space approx. 10 to 60 sec. depending on memory memory. KRN50
capacity.
Move to RECORD BACKUP SETUP with the ,
The data is saved as 'KRN100_20100815(year month
day)_091050(hour min. sec.).KRD’ file name and if keys and press the key to enter RECORD BACKUP
main set is changed or backup data capacity is over SETUP.
100MByte, it creates a new file.
※ For printing backup data, KRN100 reads saved backup
•• Set range: Disable ↔ Enable
data in memory from beginning to end at first and starts
•• Factory default: Disable printing. If backup data section is long or backup data is
※ Supporting file system is FAT16, FAT32 when using saved as low speed record mode, reading takes a lot of
an USB memory. Microsoft’s file system, NTFS, time. Therefore, print only for the desired section.
and Linux’s file system, EXT2, EXT3, etc., are not ※ In graph mode, record speed is changed by Standard
supportable. speed, Alarm, or Option Speed. Backup data is printed
※ When connecting an USB memory, KRN100 pauses with Standard speed. Therefore, original printout and
backup data download by Modbus function, and backup printout in graph mode may be different.
backup data printer function to recognize memory for
a while (depending on the capacity, max. 30 sec). ٧٧Backup data record for clearing no recording paper
※ If an USB memory’s LED flashes, do not remove an [ P.END Backup Print ]
USB memory, or it may damage to the data. If the
damage of USB memory data occurs, you can find If there is no recording paper, the icon flashes.
the saved data from KRN100 inner memory and After replacing recording paper, 「P.END BACKUP
save the desired file to an USB memory. PRINT」screen as below is activated.
Backup data recording function by P.END is same
as RECORD BACKUP. Backup Data List cannot be
changed.
Starting print by P.END Backup, it prints the data but
backup data file date, file name, and backup record
starting line.
A-11
KRN100 Series
Communication setting [COMMUNICATION SETUP ]

Set the related parameters with communication output Visit our homepage (www.autonics.com) to download
card(KRN-COM). DAQMaster program, and user manual for communication.
You can only check the item of COMMUNICATION SETUP Move to COMMUNICATION SETUP with the ,
by communication but cannot change the set.
keys, press the key to enter COMMUNICATION
This parameter is for setting and monitoring parameters SETUP.
from external upper system (PC and graph panel, etc)
or transmitting the data to external devices by RS485, KRN100 does not supports RS485 port, Ethernet
Ethernet, or USB Device communication. port at the same time for preventing system overload.
If you change one as「Enable」, the other is
It is recommended to use our dedicated software program changed「Disable」automatically.
DAQMaster for monitoring. If you want to develop
monitoring program not using our DAQMaster program or In case USB Device, it is able to set
to use the related Modbus program, please refer to user 「Enable」,「Disable」regardless of RS485 or Ethernet
manual for communication. setting.
٧٧Interface
Item RS485 Ethernet USB
Application standard Compliance with EIA RS485 - Compliance with USB V2.0
31 units 1 units
Max. connections 1 units
(address: 1 to 127) (number of occupations per a unit)
Within max. 1 Km Single cable within 100 m
Com. distance※1 Single cable within 1.5 m
(below 9600 bps) (recommended over CAT5E )
Com. method Half duplex Full duplex -
Com. synchronization
Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous
method
Com. speed 2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 bps 10/100 Mbps 12 Mbps(Full Speed)
Com. response
5 to 99 ms - -
wait time
Start Bit 1 bit (fixed) - -
Data Bit 8 bit (fixed) - -
Parity Bit None, Odd, Even - -
Stop Bit 1, 2 bit - -
Protocol Modbus RTU Modbus TCP Modbus RTU
※1. When connecting through the network such as network hub (HUB) and gateway, etc, there is no distance limit,
but it is recommended to use min. network. Please use communication cables which is satisfied the below conditions.
· RS485 communication: Shield Twist Pair over AWG24, characteristic impedance 100 Ω,
capacity component 50 pF/m cable length max. 1 km
· Ethernet communication: Over CAT5E, cable max. length: 100 m
· USB communication: Single cable built-in ferrite core within 1.5 m
Error
Displays error messages on screen and print data when error occurs.
Message Description Message Description
In case Input Type is temperature sensor(thermocouple, In case Input Type is temperature sensor(thermocouple,
RTD), if input value is higher than upper limit range, RTD), if input value is lower than lower limit range, this
this error message flashes. If input value is within upper error message flashes. If input value is within lower limit
limit range, it is removed automatically. range, it is removed automatically.
HHHH In case Input Type is analog(current, voltage), if input LLLL In case Input Type is analog(current, voltage), if input
value is higher than over 10% of upper limit input range, value is lower than over 10% of lower limit input range,
this error message flashes. If input value is within 10% this error message flashes. If input value is within 10%
of upper limit input range, it is removed automatically. of lower limit input range, it is removed automatically.
Prints HH. Prints LL.
In case Input Type is analog(current, voltage), if input

In case Input Type is analog(current, voltage), if input
value is higher than below 10% of upper limit input
value is lower than below 10% of lower limit input
range, 「_H」 is displayed with current value to notify
range,「_L」is displayed with current value to notify
_H that current value is higher than upper limit input _L that current value is lower than lower limit input range.
range.
Ex) When lower limit input range is 0 and current value
Ex) When upper limit input range is 100 and current
is -1, it displays as -1_L.
value is 102, it displays as 102_H.
If input is break, this error message flashes. When input
is connected, it is removed automatically.
BURN
Prints BH(display value by break is High) or BL (display
value by break is Low).
Inner
If universal input card is not connected, this error mes- Memory
NONE Access
sage flashes.
When there is parameter setting error, card recogni- As above screen, if excess error message for inner
ERR tion error, etc, this error message flashes twice and system memory Read/Write occurs frequently, please
KRN100 returns to previous screen. contact our service center.
※ For more functions, refer to the user manual of KRN100.
A-12
Adjustment A. Recorder
Screen display change B. Indicator
Trend graph Bar graph

C. Converter
D. Controller
Digital number
E. Thyristor
unit
Special functions for record F. Pressure

Parameter RUN transmitter
setting 3 sec. Start/Stop recording
mode
group G. Temp.
Parameter setting information print transmitter
3 sec.
H. Accessories
Manual feed (when recording stops)
3 sec.
Digital memo
3 sec.
Parameter
setting
Function key
KRN100
KRN50
Display changing
KRN100 displays measuring value as trend graph, bar graph, and digital number display(1 channel, 8-channel, 12-channel). You can
select one by the key.
Trend graph
Digital number (12-channel) Bar graph
Digital number (8-channel) Digital number (1-channel)
A-13
KRN100 Series
Parameters
RUN mode
3 sec. ※ Dot parameters may or may not appear, depending on the other parameter setting.
INPUT SETUP ALARM SETUP DIGITAL INPUT COMMUNICATION

SETUP SETUP
(input setting) (alarm setting) (digital input setting) (com. setting)
Select UI Card Select UI Channel Select DI Card

Modbus Address
(universal input card (universal input (digital input card
(com. address)
select ) select) select )
Input Set Copy Alarm Set Copy
DI- Type RS485 Port
(input parameter (copy alarm
(digital input select) (RS485 com. use)
copy) parameter)
LCD/Paper Record Alarm type
DI- Reset No Baud Rate
(display and record (alarm operation
(reset alarm number) (com. speed)
measuring value) mode)
Alarm Ref Channel
Pen Color DI- Status Parity Bit
(alarm reference
(record color) (operation status) (com. parity bit)
channel)
Record Zone Alarm Option Stop Bit

(record zone) (alarm option) (com. stop bit)
Termination Set
Tag Name Alarm Value
(terminating
(channel name) (alarm SV)
resistance)
Response Wait Time
Input Type Alarm Hysteresis
(com. response
(input specifications) (alarm hysteresis)
waiting time)
OK, Alarm ON/OFF Delay

Range/Scale Point Protocol
Cancel (alarm output ON/OFF
(decimal point) (com. protocol)
delay time)
Alarm Alarm No
Display/Temp Unit RS485 Com/Write
(alarm output alarm
(display/temp. unit) (RS485 com. write)
number)
High/Low Range Selection Alarm Card
& Graph Scale Ethernet Port
(Alarm output card
(high/low input value (Ethernet com. use)
and graph scale) select)
Low Scale/ Alarm- Status
High Scale IP Address
(relay and transistor
(high/low scale value) (IP address)
output method
Special Func Subnet Mask

(special function) (subnet mask)
Two Unit
Default Gateway
(display vacuum,
(default gateway)
static pressure)
Ref Channel Ethernet Com Write

(reference channel) (Ethernet com. write)
Input Bias USB Device Port

(error correction) (USB com. use )
Span USB Com Write

(gradient adjustment) (USB com. write)
Record Method
(data storage
method)
Filter Type
(input digital filter)
Filter Counter
(number of digital
filters)
Burnout Action
(display setting for
break)
A-14
A. Recorder
B. Indicator
C. Converter
RECORD SETUP SYSTEM SETUP FILE/MEMORY USER/INFORMATION RECORD BACKUP

SETUP SETUP DATA D. Controller
(record setting) (system setting) (file/memory setting) (user/info. setting (backup data record setting)
E. Thyristor
unit
Load Set File

Record Mode Device Name Password Record Backup F. Pressure
(parameter setting
(record mode) (device name) (password mode) (backup data record) transmitter
file open)
Digital Print type Save Set File
Date/Time Login Admin Backup Data List G. Temp.
(1 line record CH during (parameter setting transmitter
(date/time) (admin. log in) (backup data list)
numeric recording) file save)
Standard Speed Change Admin
Date Type Memory Status Start Date and Time H. Accessories
(standard record Password
(date type) (memory capacity) (password change by admin.) (start time for data save)
speed)
User Lock
Option Speed Summer Time Memory Clear End Date and Time
(user authority
(option record speed) (summer time) (memory delete) (end time for data save)
change)
Backup Print Mode
Memo Period Summer Time Period USB LogData Save Information
(backup data print
(digital memo cycle) (summer time period) (USB save function) (system info. check)
mode)
Selection Print Mode
Divide Zone Reservation Type Memory Save Option Firmware Upgrade
(backup data recording
(record zone division) (reservation record) (memory save option) (firmware upgrade)
mode setting)
Standard Period Reservation Period USB Memory
(standard record (reservation record Copy/Move
cycle) period) (data move/copy)
Reservation Time
Option Period
(reservation record
(option record cycle)
time) KRN100
Listing Language
Alarm Sound
(language for list
(alarm sound) KRN50
printing)
Alarm Speed Sampling Rate

(alarm record speed) (sampling cycle)
Power On Status
Log Speed
(record status when
(save cycle)
power ON)
Run Status Backlight
(list printing at start (LCD backlight
recording) brightness)
Baklight On/Off
List Out Option
(LCD backlight ON
(list record option)
method)
Zone Dot Line Distance
(dot line for zone
division)
CH Print Distance
(record interval for
each channel graph
Start Line Print
(start line when
starting record)
Range Print Time
(input range record
period)
A-15
KRN100 Series
Factory default
Input setting group [ INPUT SETUP ]

Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default
Select UI Card Auto set Input Type TC-K Low Scale/High Scale - Record Method Instant
Input Set Copy CH Select Range/Scale Point 0.0 Special Function None Filter Type None
LCD/Paper Record ON Display/Temp • TC, RTD ℃ Two Unit - Filter Counter -
Pen Color Auto set Unit Analog % Reference Channel - Burnout Action OFF
Record Zone None High/Low Low -200.0 Input Bias 0.0

Range •
Tag Name CH-1 to 12 & Graph Scale High 1350.0 Span -
Alarm setting group [ ALARM SETUP ]

Select UI Card Auto set Alarm Ref Channel - Alarm Hysteresis ※1 0.0 Alarm- Status ※1 NO
※1 ※1
Alarm Set Copy CH Select Alarm Option None Alarm ON/OFF Delay 0s
Alarm1 Type ※1 PV.Hi Alarm1 Value ※1 1350.0 Alarm Alarm No ※1 None

※1 ※1
Alarm 2 to 4 Type None Alarm 2 to 4 Value - Select Alarm Card Auto set
Digital input setting group [ DIGITAL INPUT SETUP ]

Select DI Card Auto set DI- Type None DI- Reset No - DI- Status -
Communication setting group [ COMMUNICATION SETUP ]

Modbus Address 1 Stop Bit 2 RS485 Com Write Enable Default Gateway -
RS485 Port Enable Termination Set Disable Ethernet Port Disable Ethernet Com Write -
Baud Rate 9600 Response Wait Time 20ms IP Address - USB Device Port Enable
Parity Bit None Protocol Modbus RTU Subnet Mask - USB Com Write Enable
Record setting group [ RECORD SETUP ]

Record Mode Graph Divide Zone None Power On Status Hold Start Line Print ON
Digital Print type TwoCH Standard Period - Run Status OFF Range Print Time Disable
Standard Speed 20mm/h Option Period - List Out Option Standard
Option Speed 20mm/h Listing Language English Zone Dot Line Distance 4.0mm
Memo Period 2hour Alarm Speed 20mm/h CH Print Distance 20.0mm
System setting group [ SYSTEM SETUP ]

Device Name KRN100 Recorder Summer Time Period - Alarm Sound OFF Backlight On/Off Temp
Date/Time Default set Reservation Type Disable Sampling Rate 125ms
Date Type yyyy/mm/dd Reservation Period - Log Speed 1s
Summer Time Disable Reservation Time - Backlight Standard
File/Memory setting group [ FILE/MEMORY SETUP ]

Load Set File None Memory Status 0% USB LogData Save Disable USB Memory • USB Copy/
Save Set File Select... Memory Clear Clear... Memory Save Option Stop Copy/Move Move..
A-16
A. Recorder
User/Information setting group [ USER INFORMATION SETUP ] B. Indicator
Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default
Password Disable Change Admin Password - Information Display... C. Converter
Login Admin - User Lock OFF Firmware Upgrade Auto set

D. Controller
E. Thyristor
Backup data record setting group [ RECORD BACKUP_ SETUP ] unit

F. Pressure
0000/00/00 transmitter
Record Backup Stop Start Date and Time Backup Print Mode Graph
00:00:00
G. Temp.
0000/00/00 transmitter
Backup Data List File Not Found!! End Date and Time Select Print Mode Graph
00:00:00
H. Accessories
※1. Alarm Type to Alarm No are displayed by the number of connected alarm cards.
※ Shaded parameters are depending on other parameters' SV. Refer to the more information of the parameter.
KRN100
KRN50
A-17
KRN50 Series
Features
• 50mm thermal transfer method of paper recorder
• Data logger function for recording without paper
• Supports RS485 communication and dedicated
communication port to set or monitor parameters in
real-time by PC/PLC
• Multi-input with high accuracy 0.2% level
(RTD, TC, Analog)
• 2-channel simultaneous recording in graphic mode
and digital mode
• High visibility and easy setting by LCD dot matrix
• Supports various option I/O function
• Small size(W96×H96×L100 mm), light weight
Please read “Caution for your safety” in operation manual
Manual
• For more information and instructions, refer to the user manual and the user manual for communication.
• The user manual includes product specifications, functions, and operations.

DAQMaster is the integrated device management program to set parameters and manage monitoring data.
Visit our website (www.autonics.com) to download user manual and integrated device management program.
Ordering information
KRN50 2 0 0 4 4 0
Power
supply 0 100-240 VAC 50 to 60 Hz
1 24VDC
Option output 0 None
4 RS485 communication output
0 None
Alarm output
2 Alarm output 2EA※1
4 Alarm output 4EA※2
CH2 control output
0 None
CH1 control output
0 None
Number of input channels 1 1-channel
2 2-channel
Item
KRN50 Thermal Line Recorder (50 mm)
※ 1. When selecting this for 2 CH model, 2EA alarm outputs for CH1 are available. In other words, you cannot set 1EA for CH1 and 1EA for CH2.
※ 2. It is selectable only for 2 CH model.
A-18
50mm Small Hybrid Recorder
Connections A. Recorder
RS485 com. output

B. Indicator
C. Converter
Contact input
Non-contact input D. Controller
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
DC power AC power
H. Accessories
F.G.
※ Shaded terminals are for the standard model. (power terminal, CH1 input terminal, DI input terminal)
※ Dot line terminals are for the option model. (CH2 input terminal, alarm output terminal, communication output terminal)
※ The DC power model does not have F.G.
※ When using 2-wire RTD, short B and b terminals.
※ For current input, connect external 50ΩB class(0.1%) high-accuracy resistor.
KRN100
Dimensions KRN50
(unit:mm)
● Panel cut-out
M3 Screw type terminal
96 100.5 (96×(N-1)+92) +1
0
14 92 +0.5
0
Parallel
mounting
92 +0.5
0
Min. 110
113.5
91.5
·N = Quantity
·Panel thickness: 1-4 mm
A-19
KRN50 Series
Specifications
Series KRN50
Power AC voltage 100-240 VAC 50 to 60 Hz

supply DC voltage 24 VDC
Allowable volt- AC voltage 85 to 110% of rated voltage

age range DC voltage 90 to 110% of rated voltage
Power AC voltage Max. 34 VA
consum-
ption DC voltage Max. 79 W
Display method LCD Dot matrix Display (resolution 128×32 Dot)

RTD JPt100Ω, DPt100Ω, DPt50Ω, Cu100Ω, Cu50Ω (5 types)
TC K, J, E, T, B, R, S, N, C, G, L, U, PLII (13 types)
Input type
· Voltage: -50.0-50.0 mV, -199.0-200.0 mV, -1.000-1.000 V, -1.00-10.00 V (4 types)
Analog · Current: 0.00-20.00 mA, 4.00-20.00 mA (2 types)
※ For current input, connect external 50 Ω B class (0.1%) high-accuracy resistor
Contact Input ON: Max. 1 kΩ, OFF: Min. 100 kΩ
Event input Non-contact Input ON: Residual voltage max. 1 V, OFF: Leakage current max. 0.05 mA
Outflow current Approx. 0.3 mA
RTD
±0.2%F.S.±1digit(25±5 ℃), ±0.3%F.S.±1digit(0 to 20 ℃, 30 to 50 ℃)
Display
TC Below -100 ℃ for TC is ±0.4%F.S.±1digit
accuracy※1
(TC-K2 has same accuracy with TC-K1 and -200 to 1350 ℃ range.)
Analog
Record accuracy ±0.5%F.S.
Alarm output CH1(AL1, AL2), CH2(AL1, AL2) Relay output(250 VAC/30 VDC 3 A 1 a)
Alarm output hysteresis ON/OFF interval setting for alarm output: 1 to 999digit variable
Communication output RS485 communication output(Modbus RTU protocol)
Set method Setting by front keys
Sampling cycle 500 ms/channel×2 channels = 1000 ms
Dielectric strength 2300 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min.(charging terminal of the other polarity)
Vibration 0.75 mm amplitude at frequency of 10 to 55 Hz (for 1 min.) in each of X, Y, Z directions for 1 hour
Relay life cycle Mechanical: Over 5,000,000 operations, Electrical: Over 100,000 operations
Insulation resistance Over 100 MΩ (at 500 VDC megger)
Noise resistance Square shaped noise by noise simulator (pulse width 1 ㎲)±2 kV
Method Direct thermal line print
Resolution 8 dot/mm
Print
Dots 384 dot/Line
Life cycle 50 km
· Record speed(recording paper speed): 10, 30, 60, 120, 240, 480, 940 mm/hour
Graphic mode
· Memo cycle: 30 s, 1 m, 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 30 m, 1 h, 2 h, 3 h, 4 h, 8 h, 16 h, 24 h
Digital mode TEXT mode record cycle: 00 m 05 s to 99 m 59 s
Record
Paper Thermal Direct Receipt Paper (57 mm×16 m)
Paper supply method Clamshell Type
Language Korean, English
Ambient temperature 0 to 50 ℃, storage: -20 to 60 ℃
Environment
Ambient humidity 35 to 85%RH, storage: 35 to 85%RH
Approval
Unit weight Approx. 700 g
※ 1. Exception range for measurement accuracy by each sensor

· J: -200 ≤ T ≤ -100 ±2.7 ℃
· R, S, C, G: 0 ≤ T ≤ 100 ±5.2 ℃
· B: Below 400 ℃, there is no accuracy standards.
· U, T: -200 ≤ T ≤ -100 ±3.5 ℃, -100 ≤ T ≤ 400 ±2.5 ℃
A-20
Input type Dot Display Input range(℃) Input range(℉) B. Indicator
1 TC-K1 -200 to 1350 -328 to 2462

K(CA)
0.1 TC-K2 -199.9 to 999.9 -199.9 to 999.9 C. Converter
1 TC-J1 -200 to 800 -328 to 1472

J(IC)
0.1 TC-J2 -199.9 to 800.0 -199.9 to 999.9 D. Controller
1 TC-E1 -200 to 800 -328 to 1472

E(CR) E. Thyristor
0.1 TC-E2 -199.9 to 800.0 -199.9 to 999.9 unit
1 TC-T1 -200 to 400 -328 to 752
T(CC) F. Pressure
0.1 TC-T2 -199.9 to 400.0 -199.9 to 752.0 transmitter
B(PR) 1 TC-B 100 to 1800 212 to 3272
G. Temp.
Thermocouple R(PR) 1 TC-R 0 to 1750 32 to 3182 transmitter
S(PR) 1 TC-S 0 to 1750 32 to 3182
N(NN) 1 TC-N -200 to 1300 -328 to 2372 H. Accessories
※1
C(TT) 1 TC-C 0 to 2300 32 to 4172
G(TT) ※2 1 TC-G 0 to 2300 32 to 4172
1 TC-L1 -200 to 900 -328 to 1652
L(IC)
0.1 TC-L2 -199.9 to 900.0 -199.9 to 999.9
1 TC-U1 -200 to 400 -328 to 752
U(CC)
0.1 TC-U2 -199.9 to 400.0 -199.9 to 752.0
Platinel II 1 TC-P 0 to 1390 32 to 2534
Cu50Ω 0.1 CU50 -199.9 to 200.0 -199.9 to 392.0
Cu100Ω 0.1 CU100 -199.9 to 200.0 -199.9 to 392.0
1 JPT1 -200 to 600 -328 to 1112
JPt100Ω
RTD 0.1 JPT2 -199.9 to 600.0 -199.9 to 999.9
KRN100
DPt50Ω 0.1 DPT50 -199.9 to 600.0 -199.9 to 999.9
1 DPT1 -200 to 600 -328 to 1112
DPt100Ω KRN50
0.1 DPT2 -199.9 to 600.0 -199.9 to 999.9
-50.0 - 50.0 mV 50 mV
-199.9 - 200.0 mV 200 mV
Voltage
-1.000 - 1.000 V 1V -1999 to 9999
Analog
-1.00 - 10.00 V 10 V (display range depends on the decimal point position)
0 - 20 mA 0-20
Current
4 - 20 mA 4-20
※ 1. C(TT): Same as existing W5(TT) type sensor.

※ 2. G(TT): Same as existing W(TT) type sensor.
A-21
KRN50 Series
Part descriptions
⑥
⑤ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫
①
②
⑬
③
④ ⑭
⑧
⑦
① CH 1 alarm(AL1) output indicator: Turns ON when AL1 of input channel 1 operates.

② CH 1 alarm(AL2) output indicator: Turns ON when AL2 of input channel 1 operates.
③ CH 2 alarm(AL1) output indicator: Turns ON when AL1 of input channel 2 operates.
④ CH 2 alarm(AL2) output indicator: Turns ON when AL2 of input channel 2 operates.
⑤ Recording start( )/Recording stop( ) indicator: turns ON when start recording (RUN). turns ON when stopping
recording (STOP).
⑥ Digital input indicator: Turns ON when setting digital input.
⑦ Recording reservation(RE) indicator: RE turns ON when recording reservation operates.
⑧ Recording paper status( )indicator: turns ON if running out of recording paper during recording (RUN).
⑨ Channel(CH) display part: Displays input channel of currently displayed PV on the PV display part.
⑩ PV display part: In RUN mode, displays PV of the current channel.
In setting mode, displays parameters and mode setting values.
⑪ Unit display part: Unit of relevant channel is indicated.
⑫ ( key: Used to enter setting mode and changing SV mode.
⑬ 3, 4 key: Used to move parameters or increase/decrease digits.
- 3 key: Digital memo key, 4 key: Recording Run/Stop key
⑭ 1 key: Used to move parameters to upper group or move digits
- Paper feeding key (STOP), printing parameter setting information key (RUN)
⑮ PC loader port: It is a PC loader port for serial communication to set or monitor parameters by PC.
Used to connect SCM-US (USB to Serial converter, sold separately).
Functions
Input unit and Scale of temperature sensor

Temperature unit setting by input type � Graph high/low-limit scale value
[ CH Temp Unit ]
For temperature sensor input type (TC, RTD), this
You can set the temperature unit as Celsius(℃), or function is to set the scale value of the recorded graph
Fahrenheit(℉) for each input temperature sensor. on recording paper. You can set the recording range
When changing temperature unit for temperature to record the specified section detailed with curve of
sensor input (Celsius[ ℃ ] ↔ Fahrenheit[ ℉ ]) current graph.
PV is also changed by the conversion calculation. When the input exceeds the graph high/low limit scale
For analog input type, this parameter [ CH Temp Unit range, it is recorded on the empty space of recording
]is not displayed. paper of at the left/right side of graph (approx. 1 mm).
When changing temperature unit, the related bias value At the starting point of digital memo recording, even
is initialized as 0. The other parameter values except though input exceeds graph high/low limit scale range,
bias maintains the existing values. the input within high/low limit input range is recorded
as its actual value.
• Set range: ℃ / ℉
• Factory default: ℃ (unit: - )
A-22
� Graph low-limit scale value [ CH Lo Graph ] Display scale

A. Recorder
This function is to set low limit scale value of graph For analog input, this function is to set (-1999 to 9999) for
within input range of each input type. particular high/low limit value in order to display high/low
• Set range: limit value of measurement input. If measurement inputs B. Indicator
are ‘a’ and ‘b’ and particular values are ‘A’ and ‘B’, it will
Min. range by each sensor input type to Graph high
display a=A, b=B as below graphs.
limit scale value[ CH Hi Graph ]- F.S. 5% C. Converter
• Set range:
• Factory default: -200 (unit: digit)
Low limit scale, High limit scale: within F.S. range
※ For analog input type, this parameter is not
• Factory default : D. Controller
displayed.
Low limit scale: 0.0, High limit scale: 100.0
� Graph high-limit scale value [ CH Hi Graph ] E. Thyristor
Display Display unit
Display
This function is to set high limit scale value of graph value value B value
B
within input range of each input type. B F. Pressure
transmitter
• Set range: A
A
Graph low limit scale value[ CH Lo Graph ] + F.S. a b
a b G. Temp.
a b A
5% to Max. range by each sensor input type Input Input
transmitter
Input value value
• Factory default: 1350 (unit: digit) value
Display Display
※ For analog input type, this parameter is not Display value value A
H. Accessories
value a b
displayed. B a b
A
A
User input range
a b B B
For analog input type, this function is to set input range. Input Input
Input value value
Set low limit input value[ CH Lo Range ] and high limit value
input value [ CH Hi Range ] to limit the input range.
• Set range Display scale function is able to change display value for
Low limit input value: Min. input range to High limit input max./min. measured input by setting high limit scale [ Hi
value -5% F.S. Scale ] and low limit scale [ Lo Scale ].
High limit input value: Low limit input +5% F.S. to Max. Ex) Set high/low scale value (input range is 0 to 10V)
input range
• Lo Scale = 0.00
• Factory default • Hi Scale = 5.00, 10.00, 15.00, -10.00
Low limit input value: Min. input range Display value KRN100
High limit input value: Max. input range
15.00
10.00 KRN50
Input correction [ CH In Bias ] 5.00
This function is to correct the error occurring from a Input value
0 10 V
thermocouple, a RTD or analog input out of allowable
error range of this unit. -10.00
This is also available to correct error when a sensor
cannot contact the subject position by calculating the error
temperature. • Lo Scale = 10.00, Hi Scale = -10.00
Variable temperature sensors have accuracy level. Display value
Because high accuracy type is expansive, standard
thermocouples are generally used. By executing this 15.00
function, you can get more accurate temperature from 10.00
standard thermocouples.
When executing input correction function, you should Input value
measure the error from a sensor accurately. If the 0 10 V
measured error is not correct, error may be greater.
-10.00
Set input correction value to each channel. [ CH1 In Bias,
CH2 In Bias ]
When changing temperature unit (℃ ↔ ℉) for temperature • Lo Scale = -5.00, Hi Scale = 5.00
sensor input type (TC or RTD), or input type, correction
value is initialized as 0. Display value
• Set range: -999 to 999 15.00
• Factory default: 0000 (unit: digit) 10.00

5.00
Input value
0 10 V
-5.00
※ When changing input type, high/low scale is changed as

factory default.
A-23
KRN50 Series
� Scale decimal point [ CH Sc Point ] � Display unit [ CH Dp Unit ]

It is able to change decimal point position for high/low This function is to set unit for recording and displaying.
limit scale value. It changes decimal point position of This parameter is displayed only for analog input type
display value (PV and SV, etc). at [ CH In Type ] parameter.
• Set range: 0 / 0.0 / 0.00 / 0.000 Even though changing analog input unit, PV is not
• Factory default: 0.0 (unit: -) converted different with temperature unit changing.
• Set range:
℃, ℉, %, ppm, V, mV, mA, Pa, kPa, pH, psi, kgf/cm2,
m3/h, mmHg, mmH2O, us0 to us9
• Factory default: % (unit: - )
Alarm output [ Alarm Setup ]

Alarm output operates too high or low temperature/scale value of the subject during displaying temperature/scale value. When
occurring alarm output by each channel, the related alarm indicators (CH1 = AL1, AL2 CH2 = AL1, AL2) turn ON.
If alarm output occurs during recording, it records that time, PV, and alarm information(AL HI =↑, AL LO =↓, SBA = B, P.END = P)
on recording paper.
To divide HI and LO marks of AL1 and AL2, AL1 marks (↑↓) and AL2 marks ( ).
� Alarm operation [ CH AL Type ]
Mode Name Record Operation Description

Off No alarm - - -
OFF H ON OFF H ON
High limit AL1= ↑ PV ≥ high limit alarm temperature(AL1.H) , alarm output

PV.Hi PV PV
alarm AL2= 90 110 is ON
High limit AL temp. High limit AL temp.
(AL1.H):90 (AL1.H):110
ON H OFF ON H OFF
Low limit AL1= ↓ PV

PV.Lo PV PV ≤ low limit alarm temperature (AL1.L) , alarm is ON
alarm AL2= 90 110
Low limit AL temp. Low limit AL temp.
(AL1.L):90 (AL1.L):110
When input is not connected or disconnected during

Sensor AL1=B recording, alarm output is ON.
SBA break -
AL2=B You can check the input break using external alarm out-
alarm
put contact by buzzer or others.
If running out of recording paper during recording, alarm
output is ON.
No paper AL1=P (measured value is saved at system memory)
P.End -
alarm AL2=P When recording paper is replaced, alarm is cleared auto-
matically (standard alarm) and P is printed on recording
paper when printing back up data.
� Alarm option [ CH AL Opt ]
Option Name Description

None Standard alarm If it is an alarm condition, alarm output is ON. Unless an alarm condition, alarm output is OFF.
Latch Alarm latch If it is an alarm condition, alarm output is ON. An ON condition is latched. (Holding the alarm output)
First alarm condition is ignored. From the second alarm condition, standard alarm operates.
StBy Standby sequence
When power is ON and it is not an alarm condition, standard alarm operates.
If it is an alarm condition, it operates both alarm latch and standby sequence.
Alarm latch and
La+St When power is ON and it is an alarm condition, it is ignored.
standby sequence
From the second alarm condition, alarm latch operates.
� Alarm temperature setting [ CH AL Lo ], [ CH AL Hi ]

Set alarm value for each alarm output operation, if current value is the alarm value, alarm output is ON.
According to the alarm output operation mode [ CH AL Type ] setting, [ CH AL Lo ], [ CH AL Hi ] parameters of
the channel is displayed.
※ When selecting high limit alarm [ PV.Hi ], only [ CH AL High ] is displayed.
※ When selecting low limit alarm [ PV.Lo ], only [ CH AL Low ] is displayed.
※ When changing Input Type Setup[ CH In Type ], [ CH AL High ] or [ CH AL Low ] value is changed within the input
range of [ CH In Type ].
※ For temperature input type (TC or RTD), if burn occurs by sensor open when alarm temperature is set as [ CH AL Low ],
the alarm operates.
• Set range: Within input type and range
• Factory default: [ CH AL Lo ]: Low limit scale value / [ CH AL Hi ]: High limit scale value (unit: ℃/℉)
A-24
� Alarm output hysteresis [ CH Alarm Hys ] Record mode[ Rec Mode ]

A. Recorder
"H" of alarm output operation mode is hysteresis. There are two modes; graph mode and digital mode to
Set ON and OFF interval of alarm output. record current PV on recording paper.
B. Indicator
• Set range: 001 to 999 • Set range: Graph / Digital
(decimal point position is same with that of input
• Factory default: Graph (unit: -)
decimal point) C. Converter
• Factory default: 001(unit: digit)
� Graph mode [ Graph Mode ]
D. Controller
� Example of alarm output Graph mode records PV with graph of curve on record-
ing paper.
● High limit alarm [ PV.Hi ] E. Thyristor
Power failure or Power OFF Power ON (re-supply)

It records current date (year-month-day), high/low limit unit
Temperature scale value of each channel by every 1 hour.
F. Pressure
Depending on the set digital memo period [ Memo transmitter
High limit alarm SV ▶ Period ], it records current time (hh:mm:ss) and PV of
(AL High) Alarm Hys each channel periodically. G. Temp.
Power ON ▶
Time transmitter
Standard ON
alarm(None) OFF
Alarm ON
latch(Latch) OFF ON H. Accessories
OFF Digital memo
Standby ON (time,
sequence(StBy) OFF
PV of each CH)
Alarm latch and ON
standby sequence OFF Real-time record
(※2) (※1)
(La+St) (date,
high/low scale)
● Low limit alarm [ PV.Lo ]
Power failure or Power OFF Power ON (re-supply) Graph low limit CH1 CH2 Graph high limit
Temperature
scale value graph graph scale value
(CH Lo Graph) (CH Hi Graph)
Alarm Hys
Low limit alarm SV ▶ � Digital mode [ Digital Mode ]
(AL Low) Time
Power ON ▶ Digital mode records PV with numerical value on
Standard ON
alarm(None) OFF recording paper. It records current time (hh:mm:ss) and
Alarm ON
latch(Latch) OFF ON PV of each channel periodically by the set print/record
Standby ON OFF period[ Rec Period ].
sequence(StBy) OFF
Alarm latch and ON For digital model, it records current date (year-month- KRN100
standby sequence OFF
(La+St) (※1) (※2) day), high/low limit scale value of each channel by
every 24 hours.
※ Standby sequence KRN50
It records current PV by digital memo function through
When power is ON and it is alarm condition, this the front key( 3 key for 3 sec.), DI input terminal (DI-2,
condition is ignored. From the second alarm condi- 1sec.) or communication.
tion, standard alarm operates. (Refer to ※1. of the
above graph.)
When power is ON and it is not an alarm condition,
standard alarm operates from the first condition.
(Refer to ※2. of the above graph.)
• Conditions of re-applied standby sequence after
occurring standby sequence:
Power ON, changing alarm value, or alarm clear
forced
※ Alarm latch
If it is an alarm condition, alarm output is ON even
though it is out of alarm range. (Holding the alarm
output)
• Conditions of clear alarm latch:
To clear alarm latch, press the 3 + 4 keys for
3 sec. when PV is below alarm value. For alarm
latch by sensor break alarm (SBA) and no paper
alarm (P.End), press the 3 + 4 keys for 3 sec.
to clear the alarm.
※ When changing alarm output operation mode [ CH

AL Type ], alarm values [ CH AL High, Low ]
are initialized as max./min. value automatically.
※ When changing alarm output option, the alarm value
maintains the existing value.
A-25
KRN50 Series
Reservation record [ Reservation ] Data save and re-recording when running out of
recording paper
Set the reservation record time in advance and it starts
to record at the set record start time (RUN) and stops to This recorder saves the measured data in inner memory
record at the set record stop time (STOP). and records it at recording paper after supplying the
power. When running out of recording paper (P.End), this
•Ex) Record Setup Record Mode: Digital
recorder cannot record the data but saves it.
Record Speed: 5sec
After replacing recording paper, the message for whether
Reservation Setup Start Time: 12:00 record the un-recorded data at the display part.
Stop Time: 12:02 Select All or Part and the recorder records the un-recorded
(Record Start)12:00:00 → 12:00:05 …… data which is from the time of running out of recording
12:01:55 → 12:02:00(Record Stop) paper. After recording this, normal recording continues.
To using reservation record function, set [ Reservation ]
as 「On」and record start time (Start Time) and record Record previous data
stop time (Stop time) parameters are displayed. It records in memory ?
during the set time. All Part Cancel
When returning to RUN mode after setting reservation
record, it stops recording and the Recording reservation • All(all of unrecorded data): Records/Prints the whole
(RE) indicator turns ON in display part. range data from the time of paper end to current time
When power is re-supplied by power failure during • Part(part of unrecorded data): Records/Prints the set
recording by reservation, if the time is within the part (start time/stop time) data of the after time of paper
reservation, it records continuously. Or not, it stops end.
recording.
• Cancel(ignores not recording): Not record/print the
When setting [ Reservation ] as 「Off」and record start saved data in memory and returns to RUN mode.
time (Start Time) and record stop time (Stop Time) para-
meters are not displayed. • Set range: All / Part / Cancel (unit: -)
• Set range: Off(not using reservation record function) • Factory default: Cancel
On(using reservation record function) When running out of recording paper during recording
(RUN) state, recording (RUN) state changes stop
• Factory default: Off recording (STOP) state automatically.
External digital input terminal Parameter setting information print [ List Print ]
� DI-1 function [ Digital Input 1 ] This function is to record the parameter setting information
: Record start(RUN) on recording paper.
This function is to operate record start (RUN) by Press the 1 key for over 3 sec. during recording, and it
external digital input terminals (no. 16, 18). stops recording PV. After recording setting information of
When setting [ Digital Input1 ] as 「Run」, it operates each menu, it records PV again.
recording at the set time of print/record period [ Rec • Recorded parameter:
Period ] on recording paper while external digital input tag name, input type, display unit, input range,
terminal is short. display range, alarm operation mode, alarm value,
When starting DI-1 function at first, it records the communication
current date and time as below. When starting record, depending on the setting of [
• 현재시간 2009년03월19일 12시30분00초(Korean) RUN On State ] parameter, it records parameter setting
• DATE 03-19-2009 12:30:00(English) information.
When setting [ Digital Input1 ] as「Off」, it does not
operate any other function.
• Set range: Off / Run
• Factory default: Off (unit: -)
� DI-2 function [ Digital Input 2 ]: Digital memo

This function is to operate digital memo by external
digital input terminals (no. 17, 18).
When setting [ Digital Input2 ] as 「Memo」, it
operates recording. It records current PV of each
channel and current time (hh:mm:ss) when one signal
<Korean> <English>
is input to the external digital input terminal.
It is same memo function with by the front key ( 3key,
3sec.).
When setting [ Digital Input2 ] as「Off」, it does not
operate any other function.
• Set range: Off / Memo
A-26
Backup data recording [ Rec Backup ] Digital Mode

Interval of Total record backup time
saving time A. Recorder
Rec Speed 2CH mode 1CH mode
It is similar with data logger to save record data in inner for 1 data
memory. 11542ⅹ5 sec. = 18138ⅹ5 sec.
5 sec. 5 sec. B. Indicator
Based on the saved back up data in inner memory, you Approx. 16 hours = Approx. 25 hours
can select whole range or part range of data to print.
1 min. 60 sec. Approx. 8 days Approx. 12 days
When entering [ Rec BackUp ] parameter, it displays the C. Converter
fixed backup start time (Start) and current save time (Stop) to to to to
to select the desired time within the saved time range as
D. Controller
below. 60 min. 3600 sec. Approx. 480 days Approx. 755 days
Start: 03/09 12:01 to to to to E. Thyristor

Stop: 03/09 12:10 unit
Graph Digital Cancel 99 min.
6000 sec. Approx. 800 days Approx. 1259 days
59 sec. F. Pressure
transmitter
In the screen, the current save time (Stop) is displayed as
fixed to select the desired time range within the saved time Lock [ Setting Lock ] G. Temp.
range but in the product, this time is updated continuously. transmitter
It limits to check parameter set value and to change it.
After entering the parameter, change (Stop) to current
time or re-entering the parameter and (Stop) displays the Parameter OFF Loc1 Loc2 Loc3
H. Accessories
current time to print backup data of current time. Alarm Setup
Reservation Setup
After
Start: 03/09 12:01 Input Setup
15 min. R e c B a c k u p : C a n c e l
Stop: 03/09 12:10 Record Setup
Graph Digital Cancel ncel Option Setup
RS485 Setup
Start: 03/09 12:01 Date/Time Setup

Stop: 03/09 12:25 Record Backup_Data
Graph Digital Cancel Environment Setup
Data storage space of this product is 18138EA (for 1CH) : Enable to check/set, : Enable to check, disable to set,
and the save time is different by record mode as the below : Disable to check
tables .
Even though setting as 「Loc1」,「Loc2」,「Loc3」,
Backup data record supports graph mode and digital [ Setting Lock ] parameter is displayed and you can
mode. To print the backup data which is the different mode change the setting.
from the saved record mode (ex: saved record mode: KRN100
digital mode, to-be-printed record mode: graph mode),
it prints the data by the record time (for digital mode) or
KRN50
cycle (for graph mode).
When the saved record mode of backup data is digital
mode, the backup data save time is different by record
time. (ex: record time of digital mode: 5 min., backup data
save interval: 5 min., time changing of stop time: every
5min.)
If the total record backup time is not over as below table,
start time is fixed and only stop time is updated.
If the total record backup time is over as below table, from
that time, both start time and stop time are updated.
• Set range: Cancel / Yes (unit:-)
• Factory default: Cancel
Interval of Total record backup time

Graph Mode
saving time
Rec Speed
for 1 data 2CH mode 1CH mode
11542ⅹ0.5 sec. 18138ⅹ0.5 sec.

960mm/h 0.5 sec. = Approx. 1 hour = Approx. 2 hours
30 min. 30 min.
480mm/h 1 sec. Approx. 3 hours Approx. 5 hours
Approx. 6 days Approx. 10 days

10mm/h 48 sec.
(153 hours) (241 hours)
A-27
KRN50 Series
Error When the related channel generates error operation, the

corresponding message is recorded at the recording time
This product displays error messages when error occurs. of the channel.
As the below figure, HH and LL message displays when
Message Description alarm does not occurs.
When input value is higher than the rated
range, flashes in 0.5 sec. (automatically
cleared when input value is within the rated a
range)
b
• Analog input
Within ±10% of input range F.S., LCD screen c
displays only PV and it records PV and HH or
d
LL at the same time on recording paper as the
‘a’ of below figure. Over ±10% of input range
F.S., LCD screen and recording paper display
HHHH, HH or LLLL, LL as the ‘b’ of below Communication
figure. This function is to set or monitor parameters from external
For scale value, when Hi, Lo scale value is Hi upper system (PC, PLC, etc) or transmit data to external
< Lo, it displays in reverse. devices by communication.
For 0-20 mA input, when Hi scale is set as 0, Communication is available by terminals or the front phone
HHHH Lo scale is set 100 and input value is out of jack. (refer to the connections for connecting terminals.)
20 mA, it displays LLLL, not HHHH. (HHHH,
LLLL are not displayed in analog input 1V.) You cannot use communications by terminals and the front
phone jack at the same time. When connecting the front
• TC, RTD input phone jack with communication device, communication
Set Hi, Lo Graph values within the by terminals (transmission function of master) is blocked
temperature range of each temperature automatically.
sensor. When PV is over Hi, Lo Graph
value, LCD screen displays only PV and it � Interface
records PV and HH or LL at the same time on Standard EIA RS485
recording paper as the ‘c’ of below figure.
Max. connections 31 units (address: 01 to 99)
Set Hi, Lo Graph values same as the
Communication
temperature range of each temperature 2-wire half duplex
method
sensor.
Synchronous
When PV is over Hi, Lo Graph value, LCD Asynchronous
method
screen and recording paper display HHHH or Com. distance Within max. 1 km
LLLL as the ‘d’ of below figure.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
Com. speed
19200, 38400, 57600 bps
When input value is lower than the rated range,
flashes in 0.5 sec. (automatically cleared when Response wait time 0.05 to 0.99 sec
input value is within the rated range) Start bit 1 bit (fixed)
LLLL Stop bit 1 or 2 bit
In case of analog input, it flashes below 10%.
(HHHH, LLLL are not displayed in analog Parity bit None, Odd, Even
input 1V.) Data bit 8 bit (fixed)
Protocol ModBus RTU
Flashes when input is disconnected except
BURN 10V input. When input is connected, it cleared
automatically. � Communication address [ Address ]
Displayed by wrong time setting for record • Set range: 01 to 99
backup and re-record of P.End or same start • Factory default: 01 (unit: -)
Time Set!! and stop time for reservation record.
� Communication speed (Bit Per Second)
Press the ( key to clear it and it returns to
[ Baud Rate ]
existing settings.
• Set range:
Displayed when setting value is over high/ 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 bps
low limit value during setting Hi, Lo Graph and • Factory default: 9600bps (unit: bps)
Over range!! range in Input Type Setup.
Press the ( key to clear it and it returns to � Parity Bit [ Parity Bit ]
existing settings.
• Set range: None, Even, Odd
Displayed if setting value is Hi<Lo or it is not • Factory default: None
within the rated range during setting Hi, Lo
Graph and range in Input Type Setup. (ex: For � Stop Bit [ Stop Bit ]
TC-K1 of -200 to 1350 ℃, the range of high
• Set range: 1,2
Hi < Lo!! limit scale value is low limit scale value+F.S. 5%
• Factory default: 2 (unit: Bit)
to max. input range of each input sensor 1350
to -122.5 ℃. In this case, SV is -123 ℃ and Hi
< Lo!! error displays.) Press the ( key to � Communication response wait time [ Resp Time ]
clear it and it returns to existing settings. • Set range: 0.05 to 0.99 sec
• Factory default: 0.05 (unit: sec)
A-28
� Communication write enable/disable[ Com Write ] Image download

A. Recorder
This function is to enable or disable to change/write SV
� User unit download
of the saved parameter by communication (PC/PLC).
Reading of parameters is available. You can download the desired unit as 16X16 size B. Indicator
• Enable: Enables to change/write SV of each image (through DAQMaster, the integrated device
parameter management program). Select the user unit in setting
mode. C. Converter
• Disable: Disables to change/write SV of each
parameter
� User logo download D. Controller
• Set range: Enable / Disable
• Factory default: Enable (unit: -) User logo is recorded at the dotted box (384X80 size)
of the below figure. You can download the desired E. Thyristor
� Application of system organization logo as 384X80 size image (through DAQMaster, the unit
integrated device management program) and check
this when printing the list. F. Pressure
transmitter
Terminating resistance
(100 to 120Ω)
G. Temp.
transmitter
H. Accessories
※It is recommended to use SCM-WF48 (Wi-Fi to RS485,

USB converter), SCM-US48I (USB to RS485 converter),
SCM-38I (RS232C to RS485 converter), SCM-US (USB
to Serial converter) of Autonics. Autonics
<Before input> <After input>
Communication converter(sold separately)
※Be sure that downloading the user logo of 384X80
SCM-WF48 (available soon) SCM-US48 size may cause the problem due to increased current
(Wi-Fi to RS485/USB (USB to RS485 converter) consumption and this image may not be printed
communication converter) normally. Please refrain from the image which has
lots of dots. It is recommended to download the
(pending) image which consists of characters as above.
KRN100
� LCD booting image download

You can download the desired booing image to display KRN50
on LCD screen (approx. 3 sec.) when supplying the
power.
SCM-38 SCM-US
(RS232C to RS485 converter) (USB to Serial converter)
<Basic image> <User-made image>
• To download the image, use DAQMaster, the

integrated device management program. (When
initializing boot image download function of
DAQMaster, the booting logo image changes as the
left basic image.)
• Basic boot image displays program revision date as
fixed.
• Image size should be 128×32 size.
※ For more functions, refer to the user manual of KRN50.
A-29
KRN50 Series
Parameters
( key
Input Type Setup CH1 Record CH1 Lo Range
※Parameter setup model: CH1 In Type CH1 Hi Range
All models
CH1 Lo Scale
CH1 Temp Unit
CH1 Hi Scale
CH1 Lo Graph
CH1 Sc point
CH1 Hi Graph Analog input
TC or RTD CH1 Dp Unit type
CH1 In Bias input type
CH1 In Bias
CH1 Tag Name
CH1 Tag Name
For 2 CH model 4 3 key
4 3 key
CH2 Record
CH2 Lo Range
CH2 In Type
CH2 Hi Range
CH2 Temp Unit CH2 Lo Scale
CH2 Lo Graph CH2 Hi Scale
CH2 Lo Graph CH2 Sc point
CH2 In Bias CH2 Dp Unit
CH2 Tag Name CH2 In Bias
CH2 Tag Name
( key
Alarm Setup CH1 AL1 Type
For 2 EA alarm model
※ Parameter setup model CH1 AL1 Opt
CH2 AL1 Type
KRN50-1002-0X
KRN50-1002-4X CH1 AL1 Low or CH2 AL1 Opt
KRN50-2002-0X CH1 AL1 High
KRN50-2002-4X CH2 AL1 Low or
KRN50-2004-0X CH1 AL2 Type CH2 AL1 High
KRN50-2004-4X CH1 AL2 Opt 4 3 key
※ X: 0 = 100-240VAC CH2 AL2 Type
1 = 24VDC CH1 AL2 Low or CH2 AL2 Opt
CH1 AL2 High
CH2 AL2 Low or
4 3 key CH1 Alarm Hys CH2 AL2 High
( key CH2 Alarm Hys

Reservation Setup Reservation
※ Parameter setup model: All models ※Displayed only
Start Time
4 3 key when [ Reservation ]
( key Stop Time is set as「On」.
Record Setup Rec Mode
※Parameter setup model:
All models Rec Period Rec Speed
4 3 key Font Memo Period
Setting as Digital Mode Font
( key
Option Setup Digital Input1 Alarm Speed
※Parameter setup model: Digital Input2 Setting as Graph Mode
All models
PWR On State
4 3 key
Run On State
( key
RS485 Setup Address
※ Parameter setup model Baud Rate
KRN50-1000-4X
KRN50-1002-4X Parity Bit
KRN50-2000-4X
Stop Bit
KRN50-2002-4X
KRN50-2004-4X Resp Time
4 3 key Com Write

( key
Date/Time Setup Date
※ Parameter setup model: All models
Time
4 3 key
( key ※Displayed only
Record Backup_data Rec BackUp Start
when [ Record
※ Parameter setup model: All models Stop Backup data ] is set
For 2 CH model as 「Yes」.
4 3 key
( key Graph
Environment Setup Display Mode
※ Parameter setup Digital
Backlight
model: All models Cancel
Setting Lock
A-30
Factory default A. Recorder
Input type setup group [ Input Type Setup ]

B. Indicator
※2 ※3 ※3
CH1 Record On CH1 Lo Scale 000.0 CH2 Record On CH2 Lo Scale 000.0 C. Converter
※2 ※3 ※3
CH1 In Type TC.K1 CH1 Hi Scale 100.0 CH2 In Type TC.K1 CH2 Hi Scale 100.0
CH1 Hi Scale CH2 Hi Scale D. Controller
CH1 Temp Unit ※1 ※2 0.0 CH2 Temp Unit ※3
※3 0.0
Decimal Point Decimal Point
※1 ※2 ※3 ※3
CH1 Lo Graph -200 CH1 DP Unit % CH2 Lo Graph -200 CH2 DP Unit % E. Thyristor
unit
※1 ※3 ※3
CH1 Hi Graph 1350 CH1 In Bias 0000 CH2 Hi Graph 1350 CH2 In Bias 0000
※2 ※3 ※3
CH1 Lo Range - CH1 Tag Name CH-1 CH2 Lo Range - CH2 Tag Name CH-2 F. Pressure
transmitter
※2 ※3
CH1 Hi Range - CH2 Hi Range -
※ 1. Displayed only when input type(In Type) is temperature sensor (TC or RTD). G. Temp.
transmitter
※ 2. Displayed only when input type(In Type) is analog (voltage/current).
※ 3. Displayed only for 2-channel model
H. Accessories
Alarm output setup group [ Alarm Setup ]

※2 ※2
CH1 AL1 Type PV.Hi CH1 AL2 Opt None CH2 AL1 Type PV.Hi CH2 AL2 Opt None
※1 ※2
CH1 AL1 Opt None CH1 AL2 Low -200 CH2 AL1 Opt None CH2 AL2 Low ※1,※2 -200
※1 ※1
CH1 AL1 Low -200 CH1 AL2 High 1350 CH2 AL1 Low ※1,※2 -200 CH2 AL2 High ※1,※2 1350
※1 ※2
CH1 AL1 High 1350 CH1 Alarm Hys 001 CH2 AL1 High 1350 CH2 Alarm Hys 001
※2
CH1 AL2 Type PV.Lo CH2 AL2 Type PV.Lo
※ These parameters are displayed only for alarm output model.

※ 1. These are related with the setting of alarm output operation mode(AL Type) .
· CH AL Type(Off, SBA or P.end): CH AL Low, CH AL High parameters are not displayed.
· CH AL Type(PV.Hi): CH AL High parameter is not displayed.
· CH AL Type(PV.Lo): CH AL Low parameter is not displayed.
※ 2. Displayed only for 2-channel model. KRN100
Reservation record setup group [ Reservation Setup ] KRN50

※1 ※1
Reservation Off Start Time 00:00 Stop Time 00:01
※ 1. Displayed only when (Reservation) is set as 「On」.
Record mode setup group [ Record Setup ]

※1
Rec Mode Graph Memo Period 30min Font Korea
※1 ※2
Rec Speed 10mm/h Rec Period 01m00s Alarm Speed 10mm/h
※ 1. Displayed only when (Rec Mode) is set as「Graph」.
※ 2. Displayed only when (Rec Mode) is set as「Digital」.
Option setup group [ Option Setup ]

Digital Input 1 Off Digital Input 2 Off PWR On State Run Run On State List
RS485 communication setup group [ RS485 Setup ] (Read Only)

Address 01 Parity bit None Response Time 0.05s
Baud Rate 9600bps Stop Bit 2 Com Write Enable
Environment setup group [ Environment Setup ]

Display Mode 2CH Backlight Temp Setting Lock Off
A-31
KN-1000B Series
Features
• High accuracy with 16bit ADC (±0.2% F.S.)

• Multi-input
: Thermometer 12 types, RTD 5 types,
analog (mV, V, mA) 6 types
• Bar graph with 101 LEDs (green), 4digit display (red)
• Various output options
: 4EA or 2EA alarm output, 4-20 mA transmission
output (isolated), RS485 communication output
• Various functions
: High/Low peak monitoring, sensor break alarm
output (burn-out), input correction, digital input (DI),
user input range, display scale, transmission output
scale, bar graph alarm display, etc.
• Built-in power supply for sensor (24VDC)
• Compact size (rear length: 70 mm)
KN 1 0 0 0 B
Size
B DIN W36×H144 mm
Power supply 0 100-240 VAC 50 to 60 Hz

1 24 VDC
0 No option
Option output
1 Transmission output (4-20 mA)
0 No alarm output
Alarm output
2 2EA alarm output
4 4EA alarm output
Item
KN-1 Bar Graph Indicator
Dimensions
(unit:mm)
80
10 ● Panel cut-out
Input
2-wire
transmitter
Selecting
DC output input S/W
Selecting -1 to +10V
input S/W
Digital
140 +0.6
Input
0
144
156
139
Relay output
SOURCE
16 max. 87.7 32 33 +0.6

0
36
B-2
Bar Graph Digital Indicator
● KN-10 B
B. Indicator
C. Converter
D. Controller
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
transmitter
● KN-12 B ● KN-14 B
G. Temp.
transmitter
H. Accessories
Specifications
Series KN-1000B
Allowable voltage range 90 to 110% of rated voltage KN-1000B
Power con- AC voltage Max. 6 VA

sumption DC voltage Max. 4 W KN-2000W
Display method 4digit: 7Segment LED Display (red), Bar LED: 101EA (green)
RTD JPt100Ω, DPt100Ω, DPt50Ω, Cu50Ω, Cu100Ω (5 types)
Thermocouple K, J, E, T, R, B, S, N, C (W5), L, U, PLII (12 types)
Input type
· Voltage: ±1.000 V, ±50.00 mV, -199.9-200.0 mV, -1.00 V-10.00 V (4 types)
Analog
· Current: 4.00-20.00 mA, 0.00-20.00 mA (2 types)
· Contact input: Max. 2 kΩ in ON,Max. 90 kΩ in OFF
Digital input · Non-contact input: Residual voltage max. 1.0 V in ON, Leakage current max. 0.03 mA in OFF
· Outflow current: Approx. 0.2mA
Alarm output 2-point: Relay contact capacity 250 VAC 3 A 1c, 4-point: Relay contact capacity 250 VAC 1 A 1a
ISOLATED DC 4-20 mA(PV transmission) load resistance max. 600 Ω
Sub output Transmission output
(accuracy: ±0.2%F.S., resolution: 8000)
Communication output RS485 (Modbus RTU)
±0.2% F.S. ±1digit (25 ℃±5 ℃)
±0.3% F.S. ±1digit ( 10 ℃ to 20 ℃, 30 ℃ to 50 ℃)
Display accuracy
In case of thermocouple and below -100 °C input, [ ±0.4%F.S. ] ±1digit
※ TC-T, TC-U is min. ±2.0 ℃
Setting method Set by front keys, or RS485 communication
Alarm output hysteresis Set ON/OFF interval (1 to 999 digit)
Sampling cycle Analog input: 100 ms, Temperature sensor input: 250 ms
Dielectric voltage 2000 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min. (between input terminal and power terminal)
Vibration 0.75 mm amplitude at frequency of 5 to 55 Hz (for 1 min.) in each of X, Y, Z directions for 2 hours
Relay 2-point Mechanical: Min. 10,000,000, Electrical: Min. 100,000 (250 VAC 3 A resistance load)
life cycle 4-point Mechanical: Min. 20,000,000, Electrical: Min. 500,000 (250 VAC 1 A resistance load)
Insulation resistance Min. 100 MΩ (at 500VDC megger)
Noise resistance Square shaped noise by noise simulator (pulse width 1 ㎲) ±2 kV
Memory retention Approx. 10 years (non-volatile semiconductor memory type)
Environ- Ambient temperature 10 to 50 ℃, storage: 20 to 60 ℃
ment Ambient humidity 35 to 85%RH, storage: 35 to 85%RH
Approval
B-3
KN-1000B Series
Input type and range
٧٧Input type selection switch
· 0-20 mA: Select it for 0(4)-20 mA input

Selecting
input S/W
· 1-10 V: Select it for 1 V-10 V input
· RTD/TC/mV/±1V: Select it for RTD, TC temperature sensor
or ±1V, mV input
This unit is multi input product. Select the proper input with the input type selection switch and select this input type in IN-P in
program mode. The setting of input type selection switch and the input type IN-P parameter should be same and it can display
the proper measurement value. Factory default is 0-20 mA.
Input type Parameter Input range(℃) Input range(℉)
K(CA) TcK1 200 to 1350 328 to 2462
K(CA) TcK2 199.9 to 999.9 328 to 1832
J(IC) TC-J 199.9 to 800.0 328 to 1472
E(CR) TC-E 199.9 to 800.0 328 to 1472
T(CC) TC-T 199.9 to 400.0 199.9 to 752.0
B(PR)* TC-B 100 to 1800 212 to 3272
Thermocouple R(PR) TC-R 0 to 1750 32 to 3182
S(PR)* TC-S 0 to 1750 32 to 3182
N(NN)* TC-N 200 to 1300 328 to 2372
C(W5)* TC-C 0 to 2300 32 to 4172
L(IC)* TC-L 199.9 to 900.0 328 to 1652
U(CC)* TC-U 199.9 to 400.0 199.9 to 752.0
Platinel II* TC-P 0 to 1390 32 to 2534
Cu50Ω* Cu50 199.9 to 200.0 199.9 to 392.0
Cu100Ω* Cu10 199.9 to 200.0 199.9 to 392.0
RTD JPt100Ω JPt1 199.9 to 600.0 328 to 1112
DPt50Ω DPt5 199.9 to 600.0 328 to 1112
DPt100Ω DPt1 199.9 to 850.0 328 to 1530
0.00 - 20.00 mA aMA1
Current
4.00 - 20.00 mA aMA2
50.0 - 50.0 mV aMV1 1999 to 9999
Analog
199.9 - 200.0 mV aMV2 (display range depends on the decimal point position)
Voltage
1.000 - 1.000 V A-V1
1.00 - 10.00 V A-V2
※ Above input types which have the * mark are not displayed.
To display the above input types, supply the power with pressing the M key.
Part descriptions
⑧ ① Display part(red)
① ● Run mode: Displays current measurement value.
② ● Parameter set mode: Displays parameter and SV.
③ ② Unit sticker part(unit sticker is an accessory.)
③ Alarm output indicator: Turns ON when the alarm is ON.
④ ④ M key: Used to enter parameter set mode, move to parameters,
⑦ save SV and return to RUN mode.
⑤ 1, 3, 4 key: Used to enter and change parameter SV.
⑤ ⑥ D.IN3: Press the 3 and 4 keys for 3 sec. at the same time, it operates the set function
⑥ (alarm clear, display hold, zero-point adjustment) at DI-K at program mode.
⑦ Bar Graph (with 101 bar LEDs, green): Displays measured value as bar graph.
⑧ Space for recognition device by user
B-4
Functions A. Recorder
Alarm [ AL-1, AL-2, AL-3, AL-4 ]

B. Indicator
This product has 2 or 4 alarms to operate individually when the value is too high or low. Alarm function is set by the combination
of alarm operation and alarm option. To clear alarm, use digital input function (setting 야DI-T, DI-K as AlRE) or turn the power
C. Converter
OFF and ON.
※ For the model (KN-10 B) without alarm output, these parameters are not displayed.
D. Controller
AT!A
E. Thyristor
Alarm option
unit
Alarm operation
F. Pressure
٧٧Alarm operation transmitter
Mode Name Alarm operation Descriptions

G. Temp.
AT)_ transmitter
ㅡ ㅡ No alarm operation
OFF H ON H. Accessories
AT! High limit alarm High limt alarm PV ≥ alarm temperature, alarm is ON
PV
value: 800℃
ON H OFF
AT@ Low limit alarm Low limt alarm PV ≤ alarm temperature, alarm is ON
PV
value:200℃
It will be ON when it detects sensor disconnection.
SBa_ Sensor break alarm ㅡ
Sensor break alarm does not have alarm option.
※ H: Alarm output hysteresis
٧٧Alarm option
Mode Name Descriptions

AT .A Standard alarm If it is an alarm condition, alarm output is ON. Unless an alarm condition, alarm output is OFF.
If it is an alarm condition, alarm output is ON. Before clearing the alarm, an ON condition is
AT .B Alarm latch KN-1000B
latched. (Holding the alarm output)
AT .C Standby sequence When power is ON and it is an alarm condition, it is ignored. From the second alarm condition, KN-2000W
standard alarm operates.
Alarm latch and
AT .D standby sequence
When power is ON and it is an alarm condition, it is ignored. From the second alarm condition,
alarm latch operates.
Alarm output hysteresis [ Program mode: A

ㅁ -HY ] High/Low peak monitoring
Set the interval of ON/OFF alarm output. [ Monitoring mode: H.PEK, L.PEK ]
The set hysteresis is applied to AL1 to AL4 and it is as This function is to save high/low peak to check the invis-
below. ible abnormal condition of system at [ hPEK ] or [ lPEK ]
※Ex) A-HY: 4, high limit alarm value: 800, in monitoring mode.
low limit alarm value: 200 When the high/low peak is out of the temperature range, it
displays HHHH or LLLL.
High limit To initialize high/low peak, press the 3, 4keys at the
alarm value A-HY:4 same time for 3 sec. at [ hPEK ] or [ lPEK ].
800
In this case, peak value is the present input value.
Error
800 796
Display Descriptions Troubleshooting
ON OFF
Flashes when measured
LLLL sensor input is lower than When input is
the temperature range. moved within the
Low limit A-HY:4 Flashes when measured temperature range,
alarm value HHHH sensor input is higher than it is cleared.
200 the temperature range
BURN Flashes when the sensor is Check temperature

break or not connected. sensor connection.
200 204 ERR Flashes when there is error Check set conditions
ON OFF to SV and re-set it.
B-5
KN-1000B Series
Parameter initialization Display scale [ Program mode: L-SC, H-SC ]
To initialize all parameter as factory default, supply the For analog input, this function is to set (-1999 to 9999) for
power to the product with pressing the M and 1 keys at particular high/low limit value in order to display high/low
the same time and it enters initialization parameter. limit value of measurement input. If measurement inputs
are ‘a’ and ‘b’ and particular values are ‘A’ and ‘B’, it will
Press the +1 keys display a=A, b=B as below graphs.
at the same time.
Display Display
Supply the power. Display value value
value B B
B
CLR
A A
M a b
a b a b Input A Input
value value
Input
NO YES value
Display
Display Display
value value value A
M a b
B a b
Completes initialization. A
A
a b Input B B
Temperature unit [ Program mode: UNIT ] value Input Input
value value
Temperature unit (℃/℉) is selectable. When changing
Display scale function is able to change display value for
temperature unit, user input range, display scale, output
max./min. measured input by setting high limit scale
scale, alarm SV are initialized. You should set the
parameters again for your purpose. [ H-SC ] and low limit scale [ L-SC ] in program mode.
※ When selecting analog input, temperature unit [ UNIT] ※Ex) Set high/low scale value (input range is 0 to 10V)
parameter is not displayed.
• L-SC= )00
• H-SC= %00, 1)00, 1%00, `)00
User input range [ Program mode: L-RG, H-RG ] Display value
When selecting analog input, you can set the input range 1%00
for your purpose. Set low limit input value [ L-RG ] and 1)00
high limit input value [ H-RG ] to limit the input range.
%00
• Set conditions: Input value
Low limit input value [ L-RG ] +20%F.S. 0 10V
< High limit input value [ H-RG ] `)00
Decimal point [ Program mode: dP ] • L-SC=1)00, H-SC= `)00

It is able to change decimal point position for high/low limit Display value
scale value. It changes decimal point position of display 1%00
value.
1)00
Transmission output scale

Input value
[ Program mode: lOUT, hOUT ] 0 10V
For 4-20 mA current output, this function is to set `)00
the display value for 4 mA [ lOUT ] and the display
value for 20 mA [ hOUT ].
The interval between lOUT and hOUT is 10% F.S. • L-SC=-%00, H-SC= %00
If it is below 10%, it is fixed as 10% of SV. Display value
1%00
Output Output 1)00
20 mA 20 mA %00
Input value
4 mA 0 10V
4 mA
-%00
Display Display
lOUT hOUT lOUT hOUT
※ When changing input type, high/low scale is

changed as factory default.
B-6
Bar graph scale [ Program mode: L-BS, H-BS ] ٧٧When setting alarm value in monitoring mode,
A. Recorder
This is to set display range for bar graph. Display range is When all alarms are OFF,
as below.
B. Indicator
Parameter Input Display range
Temp. Input range
≤ L-BS ≤ ( H-BS-1)
L-BS sensor input (low limit) C. Converter
Analog L-SC ≤ L-BS ≤ ( H-SC-1)
input
Temp. Input range
( L-BS+1) ≤ H-BS≤ D. Controller
H-BS sensor input (high limit)
Analog
( L-SC+1) ≤ H-BS ≤ H-SC
input E. Thyristor
unit
※ Relation among input range, user input range,
display scale, bar graph scale, and transmission scale
F. Pressure
The below figure is the example for 4 to 20 mA. transmitter
4 mA 20 mA
Input range G. Temp.
transmitter
L-RG= 6 H-RG= 16
User
input range
H. Accessories
Display scale L-SC= 0 H-SC= 1000

(display value) LLLL HHHH
※ The bar LED for the alarm value flashes.
L-BS= 0 H-BS= 1000
Bar graph
scale ٧٧Alarm display in RUN mode
lOUT= 100 hOUT= 900 When AL1 and AL2 are low limit alarm,
Transmission and AL3 and AL4 are high limit alarm.
output scale
4 mA 20 mA
transmission transmission
Bar graph display method [ Program mode: BAR ]

There are two methods for bar graph display;
full bar and center bar.
Full bar [ fBAR ] displays input from the bottom, and KN-1000B
center bar method [ cBAR ] displays input from “0” as
below figures.
KN-2000W
※ Ex)When L-BS= 100, H-BS= 100, PV = 50,
٧٧Full Bar: fBAR ٧٧Center Bar: cBAR

100 100
Displays the input Displays the input
from the bottom for from 0 for bar graph
bar graph scale scale
0 0 ←0
(datum point)
-50 -50
-100 ← Bottom -100 Input and transmission output extension

(datum point) [ Program mode: ExIO ]
Alarm display in bar graph This function is to extend analog input and 4 to 20 mA
transmission output to 5% or 10% range.
When setting or occurring the alarm, it displays the status
by the bar graph. Mode Operation
You can check the alarm status. When setting alarm value, 0P Outputs 4 to 20 mA within analog input range.
the bar LED for this alarm value turns ON. When alarm
Outputs 3.2 to 20.8 mA for 5% out of the analog
occurs, the bar LED for this alarm value flashes. 5P input range.
① When setting alarm value,
Outputs 2.4 to 21.6 mA for 10% out of the
The bar LED for alarm SV flashes. When alarm set is 10P analog input range.
complete, the bar LED for this alarm value turns ON.
② RUN mode ※ This parameter is displayed only for transmission output
• All set alarm values are displays in RUN mode. (4-20 mA) model. But it is not displayed when selecting
temperature sensor input.
• When it is alarm value, the bar LED for this alarm
value flashes. ※ The below of 0 mA, 0 V cannot be extended.
※If alarm set value is out of bar graph scale when setting ※ ±1 V, 10 V inputs are only available for 5% extension.
the value or in RUN mode, this value does not display in
bar graph.
B-7
KN-1000B Series
Input special function [ Program mode: InSF ] Input correction [ Program mode: IN-B ]
When selecting analog input, this function is to display the This function is to correct the error occurring from a
calculated actual value by square, root (√), or two unit thermocouple, a RTD or analog input out of allowable
function (TUF) as display value. error range of this unit.
This is also available to correct error when a sensor
Parameter Functions Graph Applications
Display
Y = AX + B
temperature.
Outputs Standard
LIN as input characteristics. Variable temperature sensors have accuracy level.
value Input for linearity. Because high accuracy type is expansive, standard
Input
thermocouples are generally used.
Outputs Display
Y = A( X ) + B In this case, temperature sensor may occur error.
the (X ≥ 0)
Used for By executing this function, you can get more accurate
measuring flows
ROOT rooted Y=0(X < 0) temperature.
by pressure
(√) input Input
When executing input correction function, you should
signal.
value measure the error from a sensor accurately. If the
Outputs
Display Y = A(X)2 + B Used for measured error is not correct, error may be greater.
(X > 0) (If InSF= TUF, IN-B as atmospheric pressure input
the outputting
SQAR squared Input
differential value not as input correction function. Refer to Two unit
input Y = -A(X)2 + B pressure by flow function.)
(X < 0)
value signal. Ex)When measured temperature is 4 ℃ and actual
TUF Refer to ‘Two unit function’ temperature is 0 ℃. Set IN-B as -4, and display value
is 0 ℃.
※ Display value and mA output value for SQAR:
Display value={( Input value - L-RG ) ×( H-SC-L-SC)}+L-SC

2
(output value) H-RG - L-RG Digital filter [ Program mode: MAvF ]

※ Display value and mA output value for ROOT : Moving average digital filter is able to stably display and
output the noise from input line and irregular signals as
Input value - L-RG
Display value={( )×( H-SC-L-SC)}+L-SC software.
(output value) H-RG - L-RG
• Filter set range: 01 to 16
(When setting as 01, digital filter function does not run.)
Two Unit Function [ Program mode: TUF ]
※ Display cycle is same when executing moving average
When connecting a pressure sensor, compound pressure digital filter.
which is below atmospheric pressure (0) is for vacuum as
mmHg and which is atmospheric pressure or over it is for
positive pressure as kg/cm2. 100ms
Atmospheric pressure is 0 kg/cm2 . When this unit
does not display 0 kg/cm2 , you can correct zero-point
adjustment function.
When using two unit function, L-SC is fixed as -760. S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9
L-SC parameter is displayed but you cannot set this. You
can set H-SC within 0 to 9999 range.
Sn: Sampling value
Dn: Display value
Ex)When pressure range is 760.0 mmHg to 3.000 kg/cm2

, and pressure transmitter outputs 4-20 mA, set the
scale as H-SC: 3000, dP: )000. This unit displays for
4 mA input as -760, and for 20 mA input as #000. D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Display D1=S1, D2=S2, D3=S3

: Initial operation before averaging 4
S1+S2+S3+S4 S2+S3+S4+S5
D4= D5=
4 4
S3+S4+S5+S6 S4+S5+S6+S7
D6= D7=
4 4
Input S5+S6+S7+S8
D8=
4
B-8
Burn Out [ Program mode: BURN ]

Communications A. Recorder
When disconnecting input sensor, you can set the status
of transmission output. Communication set
• When setting BURN as ON, [ Program mode: ADDR, BAUD ] B. Indicator
4-20 mA transmission output is fixed as 20 mA. You can set communication address [ ADDR ] and
• When setting BURN as OFF, communication speed [ BAUD ] for RS485 communication. C. Converter
4-20 mA transmission output is fixed as 4 mA.
※ It is available only for temperature sensor input and
Communication specifications D. Controller
4-20 mA transmission output.
Item Specifications
E. Thyristor
Digital input [ Program mode: DI-T, DI-K ] Communication unit
RS485 2-wire half duplex
method
By digital input terminal [ DI-T ] (no. 12, 13 terminals) or F. Pressure
Communication
digital input key [ DI-K ] (D.IN3: 4 + 3 for 3 sec.), one of 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200 transmitter
speed (BPS)
three functions executes as the below table.
Converter Converter built in RS232 G. Temp.
Function Operaiton transmitter
Max. connections 32 units
When alarm is ON in RUN mode, Communication Max. 1200m
it clears alarm forcibly. (It applies H. Accessories
distance (within 700 m recommended)
only for alarm latch, alarm latch and
standby sequence options.) Protocol MODBUS 1.1 RTU
Alarm clear operates only when the Parity None
AlRE Alarm clear value is out of the alarm value range.
After clearing alarm, alarm operates Stop Bit 1Bit
its option normally. Data length 8Bit
※ For the model without alarm output
(KN-10 B), this parameter is not
displayed.
Communication manual
Temporarily indicated value is Refer to communication manual for RS485 communication.
Display
HOLD stopped in order to check indicated
HOLD Visit our web site (www.autonics.com) to download
value in unstable input.
communication manual and software [ Integrated device
Set preset display value as 0. management program: DAQMaster ].
This function is related with input
correction [ IN-B ]. When executing
ZERO Zero-point
adjustment zero adjustment function in display KN-1000B
value as 4, input correction value [
Integrated device management program
IN-B ] is set as -4 automatically. (DAQMaster)
DAQMaster is the integrated device management program KN-2000W
to set parameters and manage monitoring data.
Lock [ Program mode: LOCK ] Visit our website (www.autonics.com) to download user
manual and integrated device management program.
< Computer specification for using software >
OFF LOC1 LOC2
Program mode
IBM PC compatible computer with Intel
Monitoring mode System
Pentium Ⅲ or above
: Enable to check/set, Operating system Microsoft Windows 98/NT/XP/Vista/7
: Enable to check, disable to set,
: Disable to check Memory 256MB or more
※In LOC2, only LOCK parameter displays in program Hard disk More than 1GB of free hard disk space
mode.
< DAQMaster screen >
B-9
KN-1000B Series
Monitoring mode
※ 1. S :Press any key among the 1, 3, 4.
RUN mode ※ 2. 1: Moves digits / 3, 4: Changes SV.
※ 3. Press the M key after checking/changing SV in each parameter.
Press M key. The value flashes twice and is saved. It moves to next parameter.
※ After entering setting group, press the M key for 3 sec. or there is no additional key operation
in 30 sec., it returns to RUN mode.
※ : This parameter may or may not appear, depending on the other parameter settings.
※1 ※2
Alarm 1 value ※Displayed only for alarm output models.
S
AL1 09(9
M M ※3
Set each alarm value; [ AL-1 to AL-4 ] in program mode.
Alarm 2 value • Set range: Temperature sensor input → within temperature range
S
Analog input → L-SC to H-SC
AL2 09(9
※ When alarm operation [ AL-1 to AL-4 ] in program mode is
M
no alarm [ AT)_ ] or sensor break alarm [ SBa_ ],
Alarm 3 value these parameters are not displayed.
S ※ For 2EA alarm output model (KN-12 B), AL3, AL4 are not displayed.
AL3 00)1
M
Alarm 4 value
S
AL4 00)1
M
High peak value

S
hPEK ----
M
Displays high/low peak value.
Low peak value ※ High/Low peak value is available only to check and initialize it.
S (Refer to ‘High/Low peak monitoring’ for initialization.)
lPEK ---- ※ Initial high/low peak is saved after 2 sec. from supplying the power.
M
Program mode
RUN mode ※ 2. 1: Moves digits / 3, 4: Changes SV.
Press M key The value flashes twice and is saved. It moves to next parameter.
for 3 sec. ※ After entering setting group, press the M key for 3 sec. or there is no additional key operation
※1
Input type ※2
S
IN-P aMA1 Select input type. (Refer to 「Input type and range」.)
M M ※3
Temperature ※ Displayed only when selecting temperature sensor input type.

unit
S
UNIT ?C Select temperature unit. ?C ?F
M
※ Displayed only when selecting analog input type.

Low limit input value
S Set low limit of input range.
L-RG 0$00 • Set range: within analog input type range
M
High limit input value

S Set high limit of input range.
H-RG 2)00 • Set range: within analog input type range
M
Decimal point
S Select decimal point position of display scale value.
dP )0
M )0 )00 )000 0
B-10
A. Recorder
Low limit
scale value
S Set low limit scale value.
L-SC 00)0 B. Indicator
• Set range: -1999 to 9999
M
C. Converter
High limit
scale value
S
Set high limit scale value.
H-SC 10)0 D. Controller
M
• Set range: -1999 to 9999
E. Thyristor
Input correction unit
S Set input correction value.
IN-B 0000 • Set range: -999 to 999 F. Pressure
M transmitter
G. Temp.
Bar graph low limit
scale value transmitter
S Set low limit scale value for bar graph display.
L-BS 00)0 • Set range: Temperature sensor input H. Accessories
M
→ within temperature range (low limit) ≤ L-BS ≤ (H-BS-1)
Analog input → L-SC ≤ L-BS ≤ (H-SC-1)
Bar graph high limit
scale value
S Set high limit scale value for bar graph display.
H-BS 00)0 • Set range: Temperature sensor input
M
→ (L미ㅣ-BS+1) ≤ H-BS ≤ within temperature range (high limit)
Bar graph Analog input → (L미ㅣ-SC+1) ≤ H-BS ≤ H-SC
display method
S
BAR fBAR Set display method for bar graph. fBAR cBAR
M
4 mA output ※ Displayed only for transmission output model.

scale value
S Set output scale value for 4 mA.
lOUT 00)0 • Set range: Temperature sensor input → within temperature range,
M Analog input → L-SC to H-SC KN-1000B
20 mA output
scale value Set output scale value for 20 mA.
S KN-2000W
hOUT 10)0 • Set range: Temperature sensor input → within temperature range,
M Analog input → L-SC to H-SC
Input and transmission

output extension ※ Displayed only when selecting analog input type.
S Select extension range of 4-20 mA input and transmission output.
EX.I0 SP
M SP 10P 0P
※ Displayed only for alarm output models.

AL1 mode
S
AL-1 AT!A <Alarm operation> <Alarm option>
M S
Set AL1 to AL-1 AT!A AT!A
AL4 alarm M
M
AL2 mode operation
S and option. AL-2 AT@A AT!B
AL-2 AT!A M
M
AL-3
M
SBa_ AT!C
AL3 mode AL-4
S
AL-3 AT@A M AT)_ AT!D
Next parameter
M
※※ SV changing method of AL-2 to AL-4 is same as AL-1’s.
AL4 mode ※ For 2EA alarm output model (KN-12 B), AL3, AL4 are not displayed.
S ※ No alarm [ AT)_ ], sensor break alarm [ SBa_ ] do not have alarm option.
AL-4 AT@A ※ Set alarm value [ AL1 to AL4 ] in monitoring mode.
M
AL output hysteresis
S Set alarm output hysteresis.
A-HY 001 • Set range: 001 to 999
M
※ When alarm operation [ AL-1 to AL-4 ] in program mode is no alarm [ AT)_ ] or
sensor break alarm [ SBa_ ], this parameter is not displayed.
B-11
KN-1000B Series
※Displayed only when selecting analog input type.
Input special function
S
InSF LIN Select input special function.
M
LIN ROOT SQAR TUF
Digital filter
S Set the number of moving average digital filters.
MAvF 04
• Set range: 01 to 16
M
Digital input terminal

S Select digital input function by no. 12 and 13.
DI-T HOLD ※ For the model without alarm output(KN-10 B), AlRE is not displayed.
M
HOLD ZERO AlRE
Digital input key

S Select digital input function by front keys.
DI-K HOLD ※ Press the 3, 4 keys for 3 sec. at the same time and it executes the selected function.
M
※ For the model without alarm output (KN-10 B), AlRE is not displayed.
HOLD ZERO AlRE
Sensor break ※Displayed only for transmission output model.

alarm output
S Select output status when sensor is disconnected.
BURN OFF
M ON OFF
※ Displayed only for RS485 communication

Communication
address output model.
S Set communication address.
ADDR 01 • Set range: 01 to 99
M
Communication
speed
S Select communication speed (baud rate).
BAUD 9600
M 9600 4800 2400 1200
Lock
S Select lock function.
LOCK OFF
M OFF LOC1 LOC2
B-12
Monitoring mode B. Indicator

AL1 09(9 AL3 00)1 hPEK ---- C. Converter
AL2 09(9 AL4 00)1 lPEK ----

D. Controller
Program mode
E. Thyristor
Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default unit
IN-P AMa1 IN-B 0000 AL-1 AT!A DI-T HOLD F. Pressure

UNIT ?C L-BS 00)0 AL-2 AT!A DI-K HOLD transmitter
L-RG 0)00 H-BS 10)0 AL-3 AT@A BURN OFF

G. Temp.
H-RG 2)00 BAR fBAR AL-4 AT@A ADDR 01 transmitter
dP )0 lOUT 00)0 A-HY 001 BAUD 9600

H. Accessories
L-SC 00)0 hOUT 10)0 InSF LIN LOCK OFF
H-SC 10)0 E .10 SP MAuF 04
Proper usage
Caution for using
• For connecting the power, use a crimp terminal

(M3.5, min. 7.2 mm).
• The connection of this unit should be separated from
the power line and high voltage line in order to prevent
inductive noise.
• Install a power switch or a circuit breaker to supply or
KN-1000B
cut off the power.
• Switch or circuit breaker should be installed nearby
users for convenient control. KN-2000W
• Do not use this unit near the high frequency instruments

(high frequency welding machine & sewing machine,
large capacity SCR controller).
• When supplying input, if H H H H or LLLL is displayed,
measured input may have problem. Turn off the power
and check the line.
• Installation environment.
① It shall be used indoor.
② Pollution Degree 2
③ Altitude max. 2,000 m
④ Installation category Ⅱ
• It may cause malfunction if above instructions are not
followed.
B-13
KN-2000W Series
Features
• High accuracy with 16bit ADC (±0.2% F.S.)

• Max. display range: 19999 to 19999
• Multi-input
: Thermometer 12 types, RTD 5 types,
analog (mV, V, mA) 6 types
• Auto display color change function (for error or alarm)
• Various output options:
4EA or 2EA alarm output, 4-20 mA transmission
output (isolated), RS485 communication output
※Full output option model is available.
(alarm output 4EA + RS485 communication output
+transmission output)
: High/Low peak monitoring, sensor break alarm
output (burn-out), input correction, digital input (DI),
user input range, display scale, Please read “Caution for your safety” in operation manual
transmission output scale, etc. before using this unit.
• Built-in power supply for sensor (24 VDC)
KN-2 0 0 0 W
Size
W DIN W96×H48 mm
Power supply 0 100-240 VAC 50 to 60 Hz

1 24 VDC
0 No option
1 Transmission output (4-20 mA)
Option output
Transmission output (4-20 mA)
5
+ RS485 communication output
0 No alarm output
Alarm output
2 2EA alarm output
4 4EA alarm output
Item
KN-2 Multi Indicator
Dimensions
(unit:mm)
48
96 10
108 90
● Panel cut-out
Min. 116
44.8
46 +0.6
0
Min. 52
92 +0.6
0
91
B-14
Multi Indicator
● KN-20 W ● KN-22 W ● KN-24 W

B. Indicator
C. Converter
RTD/TC/mV/±1V
D. Controller
-1 to +10V
0 to 20mA
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
transmitter
F.G.
G. Temp.
transmitter
H. Accessories
Specifications
Series KN-2000W

Power con- AC voltage Max. 8 VA

sumption DC voltage Max. 3 W
Display method 4 1/2 digit : 7 Segment LED Display (selectable red, green, yellow), character size : W10 mm×H17 mm
RTD JPt100Ω, DPt100Ω, DPt50Ω, Cu50Ω, Cu100Ω (5 types) KN-1000B
Thermocouple K, J, E, T, R, B, S, N, C (W5), L, U, PLII (12 types)

Input type
· Voltage : ±1.0000 V, ±50.00 mV, ±200.0 mV, 1.000 V-10.000 V (4 types) KN-2000W
Analog
· Current : 4.00-20.00 mA, 0.00-20.00 mA (2 types)
· Contact input : Max. 2 kΩ in ON,Max. 90 kΩ in OFF
Digital input · Non-contact input : Residual voltage max. 1.0 V in ON, Leakage current max. 0.03 mA in OFF
· Outflow current : Approx. 0.2 mA
Alarm output 2-point : Relay contact capacity 250 VAC 3 A 1c, 4-point : Relay contact capacity 250 VAC 1 A 1a
ISOLATED DC 4-20 mA (PV transmission) load resistance max. 600 Ω
Sub output Transmission output
(accuracy: ±0.2%F.S., resolution: 8000)
Communication output RS485 (Modbus RTU)
±0.2% F.S. ±1digit (25±5 ℃)
±0.3% F.S. ±1digit ( 10 to 20 ℃, 30 to 50 ℃)
Display accuracy
In case of thermocouple and below -100 °C input, [ ±0.4% F.S. ]±1digit
※ TC-T, TC-U is min. ±2.0 ℃
Setting method Set by front keys, or RS485 communication
Alarm output hysteresis Set ON/OFF interval (1 to 999 digit)
Sampling cycle Analog input : 100 ms, Temperature sensor input : 250 ms
Dielectric voltage 200 0VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min. (between input terminal and power terminal)
Relay 2-point Mechanical: Min. 10,000,000, Electrical: Min. 100,000 (250 VAC 3 A resistance load)
life cycle 4-point Mechanical: Min. 20,000,000, Electrical: Min. 500,000 (250 VAC 1 A resistance load)
Environ- Ambient temperature 10 to 50 ℃, storage: 20 to 60 ℃
ment Ambient humidity 35 to 85%RH, storage: 35 to 85%RH
Approval
B-15
KN-2000W Series
Input type and range
٧٧Input type selection switch
● 0-20mA :Select it for 0(4)-20 mA input

● 1-10V : Select it for 1V-10 V input
● TD/TC/mV/±1V : Select it for RTD, TC temperature sensor
or ±1 V, mV input
This unit is multi input product. Select the proper input with the input type selection switch and select this input type in IN-P in
program mode. The setting of input type selection switch and the input type IN-P parameter should be same and it can display
the proper measurement value. Factory default is 4-20mA.
Input type Parameter Input range(℃) Input range(℉)

K(CA) TC-K 200.0 to 1350.0 328 to 2462
J(IC) TC-J 200.0 to 800.0 328.0 to 1472.0
E(CR) TC-E 200.0 to 800.0 328.0 to 1472.0
T(CC) TC-T 200.0 to 400.0 328.0 to 752.0
R(PR) TC-R 0.0 to 1750.0 32 to 3182
B(PR)* TC-B 400.0 to 1800.0 752 to 3272
Thermocouple
S(PR)* TC-S 0.0 to 1750.0 32 to 3182
N(NN)* TC-N 200.0 to 1300.0 328 to 2372
C(W5)* TC-C 0 to 2300 32 to 4172
L(IC)* TC-L 200.0 to 900.0 328.0 to 1652.0
U(CC)* TC-U 200.0 to 400.0 328.0 to 752.0
Platinel II* TC-P 0.0 to 1390.0 32 to 2534
Cu50Ω* Cu50 200.0 to 200.0 328.0 to 392.0
Cu100Ω* Cu10 200.0 to 200.0 328.0 to 392.0
RTD JPt100Ω JPt1 200.0 to 600.0 328.0 to 1112.0
DPt50Ω DPt5 200.0 to 600.0 328.0 to 1112.0
DPt100Ω DPt1 200.0 to 850.0 328.0 to 1530.0
0.00 - 20.00 mA aMA1
Current
4.00 - 20.00 mA aMA2
50.00 - 50.00 mV aMV1 19999 to 19999
Analog
200.0 - 200.0 mV aMV2 (display range depends on the decimal point position)
Voltage
1.0000 - 1.0000 V A-V1
1.000 - 10.000 V A-V2
※ Above input types which have the * mark are not displayed.
To display the above input types, supply the power with pressing the ( key.
Part descriptions
①
① Display part(red)
● Run mode : Displays current measurement value.
● Parameter set mode : Displays parameter and SV.
②
③ ② Unit indicator : Displays the set unit.
③ Alarm output indicator : Turns ON when the alarm is ON.
⑤ ④ ( key: Used to enter parameter set mode, move to
parameters, save SV and return to RUN mode.
⑤ 1, 4, 3 key: Used to change parameter SV.
⑥ D.IN3 : Press the 4 and 3 keys keys for 3 sec. at the same
④ ⑥
time, it operates the set function (alarm clear, display
hold, zero-point adjustment) at [ DI-K ] at program
mode.
B-16
Multi Indicator
Alarm [ AL-1, AL-2, AL-3, AL-4 ]

B. Indicator
This product has 2 or 4 alarms to operate individually when the value is too high or low. Alarm function is set by the combination
of alarm mode and alarm option.
C. Converter
To clear alarm, use digital input function (setting 야DI-T, DI-K as AlRE) or turn the power OFF and ON.
※ For the model (KN-20 W) without alarm output, these parameters are not displayed.
D. Controller
AT!A
Alarm option E. Thyristor
unit
Alarm operation
٧٧Alarm operation F. Pressure
transmitter
Mode Name Alarm operation Descriptions
G. Temp.
AT)_ ㅡ ㅡ No alarm operation transmitter
OFF H ON
AT! High limit alarm PV ≥ alarm temperature, alarm is ON H. Accessories
High limt alarm
PV
value: 800℃
ON H OFF
AT@ Low limit alarm Low limt alarm PV ≤ alarm temperature, alarm is ON
PV
value:200℃
※ H : Alarm output hysteresis
٧٧Alarm option

AT .B Alarm latch
latched. (Holding the alarm output) KN-1000B
AT .C Standby sequence When power is ON and it is an alarm condition, it is ignored. From the second alarm condition,
KN-2000W
Alarm latch and
AT .D When power is ON and it is an alarm condition, it is ignored. From the second alarm condition,
standby sequence
Alarm output hysteresis [ Program mode: A-HY ] High/Low peak monitoring

Set the interval of ON/OFF alarm output. [ Monitoring mode: H.PEK, L.PEK ]
The set hysteresis is applied to AL1 to AL4 and it is as This function is to save high/low peak to check the invisible
below. abnormal condition of system at [ h PEK] or [ lPEK] in
monitoring mode.
※Ex) A-HY: 4, high limit alarm value: 800,
When the high/low peak is out of the temperature range, it
low limit alarm value: 200
displays HHHHor LLLL.
To initialize high/low peak, press the 3, 4keys at the
High limit same time for 3 sec. at [ h PEK] or [ lPEK].
alarm A-HY:4 In this case, peak value is the present input value.
value
800
Error
800 796 Flashes when measured
ON OFF LLLL sensor input is lower than When input is
the temperature range. moved within the
Flashes when measured temperature range, it
HHHH sensor input is higher than is cleared.
Low limit A-HY:4
the temperature range
alarm
value
200
BURN Flashes when the sensor is
break or not connected.
Check temperature
sensor connection.
ERR Flashes when there is error Check set conditions

and re-set it.
to SV
200 204
ON OFF Flashes when IN-P setting
ERR1 and input type selection switch Check input type.
setting are not same.
B-17
KN-2000W Series
Parameter initialization Display scale [ Program mode : L-SC, H-SC ]
To initialize all parameter as factory default, supply the For analog input, this function is to set (-19999 to 19999)
power to the product with pressing the ( and 1 keys for particular high/low limit value in order to display high/
at the same time and it enters initialization parameter. low limit value of measurement input. If measurement
inputs are ‘a’ and ‘b’ and particular values are ‘A’ and ‘B’, it
Press the ( + 1 keys will display a=A, b=B as below graphs.
at the same time.
Display Display Display
Supply the power. value value B value
B B
CLR A A
a b
a b a b A
( Input Input Input
value value value
NO YES Display
value
Display
value
Display
value A
B a b
( a b
A
A
Completes initialization.
a b B
B
Temperature unit [ Program mode : UNIT ] Input Input Input
value value value
Temperature unit (℃/℉) is selectable. When changing Display scale function is able to change display value for
temperature unit, user input range, display scale, output max./min. measured input by setting high limit scale
scale, alarm SV are initialized. You should set the param- [ H-SC] and low limit scale [ L-SC] in program mode.
eters again for your purpose.
※Ex) Set high/low scale value (input range is 0 to 10V)
※ When selecting analog input, temperature unit [ UNIT ]
parameter is not displayed. • L-SC= )00
• H-SC= %00, 1)00, 1%00, `)00
Front display unit [ Program mode : dUNT ] Display value
1%00
When selecting analog input, select the unit (%, °C, °F, not
display) of display value. 1)00
※ When not displaying unit, set OFF and it turns OFF all %00
indicators. Input value
0 10V
※ When selecting temperature sensor input, this param-
eter [ dUNT ] is not displayed. `)00
User input range [ Program mode : L-RG, H-RG ] • L-SC=1)00, H-SC= `)00
Display value
When selecting analog input, you can set the input range
for your purpose. Set low limit input value [ L-RG ] and 1%00
high limit input value [ H-RG ] to limit the input range. 1)00
• Set conditions :
Low limit input value [ L-RG ]+20%F.S. < High limit Input value
input value [ H-RG ] 0 10V
`)00
Input and transmission output extension

[ Program mode: ExIO ] • L-SC=-%00, H-SC= %00
This function is to extend analog input and 4 to 20mA Display value
transmission output to 5% or 10% range. 1%00
Mode Operation 1)00

%00
0P Outputs 4 to 20 mA within analog input range.
Input value
Outputs 3.2 to 20.8 mA for 5% out of the analog 0 10V
5P input range. -%00

10P analog input range.
※ This parameter is displayed only for transmission output ※ When changing input type, high/low scale is changed as
(4-20 mA) model. But it is not displayed when selecting factory default.
B-18
Multi Indicator
Transmission output scale Two Unit Function [ Program mode: TU F ]

A. Recorder
[ Program mode : lOUT, hOUT ]
When connecting a pressure sensor, compound pressure
For 4-20 mA current output, this function is to set the dis- which is below atmospheric pressure (0) is for vacuum as
play value for 4 mA [ lOUT ] and the display value for 20 mmHg and which is atmospheric pressure or over it is for B. Indicator
mA [ hOUT ]. positive pressure as kg/cm2.
The interval between lOUT and hOUTis 10% F.S. If it is Atmospheric pressure is 0 kg/cm2. When this unit does not C. Converter
below 10%, it is fixed as 10% of SV. display 0 kg/cm2 , you can correct zero-point adjustment
Output Output function.
20mA D. Controller
20mA When using two unit function, L-SC is fixed as -760.
L-SC parameter is displayed but you cannot set this. You
E. Thyristor
4mA 4mA can set H-SC within 0 to 19999 range. unit
Display Display
lOUT hOUT lOUT hOUT Ex) When pressure range is 760.0 mmHg to 3.000 kg/ F. Pressure
※ Relation among input range, user input range, display cm2, and pressure transmitter outputs 4-20 mA, set transmitter
scale, and transmission scale the scale as H-SC: 3000, dP: )000.
This unit displays for 4 mA input as -76)0, and for 20 G. Temp.
The below figure is the example for 4 to 20 mA. mA input as #000. transmitter
4mA 20mA Display

Input range H. Accessories
L-RG= 6 H-RG= 16
User
input range
L-SC= 0 H-SC= 1000

Display scale LLLL HHHH
(display value)
lOUT= 100 hOUT= 900 Input

Transmission
output scale
4mA 20mA
Input special function [ Program mode: InSF ]

When selecting analog input, this function is to display the
calculated actual value by square, root (√), or two unit
function (TUF) as display value. KN-1000B
Input correction [ Program mode: IN-B ]
Parameter Functions Graph Applications This function is to correct the error occurring from a ther-
KN-2000W
Display mocouple, a RTD or analog input out of allowable error
Y = AX + B Standard
Outputs range of this unit.
characteristics.
LIN as input This is also available to correct error when a sensor can-
Input Input for
value
linearity. not contact the subject position by calculating the error
temperature.
Outputs Display Y = A( X ) + B Used for
(X ≥ 0) Variable temperature sensors have accuracy level. Be-
the rooted measuring flows
ROOT Y=0(X < 0) cause high accuracy type is expansive, standard thermo-
(√) input by pressure
Input couples are generally used.
value signal.
In this case, temperature sensor may occur error.
Outputs Display Y = A(X)2 + B Used for By executing this function, you can get more accurate
the (X > 0) outputting temperature.
SQAR squared Input differential
When executing input correction function, you should
input Y = -A(X)2 + B pressure by flow
measure the error from a sensor accurately. If the mea-
value (X < 0) signal.
sured error is not correct, error may be greater.
TUF Refer to ‘Two unit function’ (If InSF= TUF, IN-B as atmospheric pressure input value
not as input correction function. Refer to Two unit func-
※ Display value and mA output value for SQAR:
tion.)
Input value - L-RG 2×( H-SC-L-SC)}+L-SC
Display value={( ) Ex) When measured temperature is 4 ℃ and actual
(output value) H-RG - L-RG temperature is 0 ℃. Set IN-B as -4, and and display
※ Display value and mA output value for ROOT : value is 0 ℃.
Input value - L-RG
Display value={( )×( H-SC-L-SC)}+L-SC
Decimal point [ Program mode: d P ]

It is able to change decimal point position for high/low limit
scale value. It changes decimal point position of display
value.
B-19
KN-2000W Series
Digital input [ Program mode: DI-T, DI-K ] ٧٧RUN mode and error display color
[ Program mode: CLOR ]
By digital input terminal [ DI-T ] (no. 6, 7 terminals) or
digital input key [ DI-K ] (D.IN3 : 4+3 for 3 sec.), one of Parameter Display color
three functions executes as the below table. SV RUN Error
Function Operaiton RED Red Red

When alarm is ON in RUN mode, GRN Green Green
it clears alarm forcibly. (It applies
YELO Yellow Yellow
only for alarm latch, alarm latch and
standby sequence options.) R--G Red Green
Alarm clear operates only when the
AlRE G--R Green Red
Alarm clear value is out of the alarm value range.
After clearing alarm, alarm operates
its option normally. ٧٧Alarm display color[ Program mode: C-AL ]
※ For the model without alarm output
This parameter is displayed only for the alarm output
(KN-20 W), this parameter is
models (KN-22 W, KN24 W).
not displayed.
• The number of set digit is same as the number of
Temporarily indicated value is
alarm output.
HOLD Display stopped in order to check indicated
HOLD [ 2 alarm outputs (KN-22 W) ]
value in unstable input.
S
Set preset display value as 0.
This function is related with input [ 4 alarm outputs(KN-24 W) ]
correction [ IN-B ]. S
Zero-point
ZERO When executing zero adjustment
adjustment
function in display value as 4, input • Set color for each alarm.
correction value [ IN-B ] is set as -4 It changes as R→ G → Y → R in turn.
automatically.
※ Ex) S :Press any one among the 1, 3, 4 keys.
S
Digital filter [ Program mode: MAvF ] RUN mode color is green.
Moving average digital filter is able to stably display and
output the noise from input line and irregular signals as ① AL-1 is ON,
software. S display is green → yellow.
• Filter set range : 01 to 16 ② AL-2 is ON,

AL-4 color display is yellow → red.
(When setting as 01, digital filter function does not run.)
※ Display cycle is same when executing moving average
AL-3 color ③ AL-3 is ON,
AL-2 color display is red → green.
digital filter. AL-1 color
④ AL-4 is ON,
100ms display is green → red.
• When alarm is cleared, or two alarms operate at the

same time, the latest alarm’s color is applied.
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 • When error occurs [ HHHH, LLLL, BURN, ERR, ERR1 ]
during alarm, the set color of CLOR is applied.
Sn: Sampling value Alarm output for disconnecting input sensor

Dn: Display value [ Program mode: BURN ]
When disconnecting input sensor, you can set the status
of transmission output.
Transmission
Parameter SV output Alarm output
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 (4-20 mA)
D1=S1, D2=S2, D3=S3 High limit Low limit

ON 20 mA+5% output
: Initial operation before averaging 4 alarm ON alarm OFF
BURN
S1+S2+S3+S4 S2+S3+S4+S5 High limit Low limit
OFF 4 mA-5% output
D4= D5= alarm OFF alarm ON
4 4
S3+S4+S5+S6 S4+S5+S6+S7 Lock [ Program mode: LOCK ]

D6= D7=
4 4 It limits to check parameter set value and to change it.
S5+S6+S7+S8
D8= OFF LOC1 LOC2
4
Program mode
Display color [ Program mode: CLOR/ C-AL ] Monitoring mode
This function is to change display color for occurring error, : Enable to check/set
operating alarm automatically. User can check the status : Enable to check, disable to set,
of this unit directly. : Disable to check
※ Color of monitoring mode, program mode is red. ※In LOC2, only LOCK parameter displays in program
mode.
B-20
Multi Indicator
Communications A. Recorder
Communication set Communication manual B. Indicator

[ Program mode: ADDR, BAUD ] Refer to communication manual for RS485 communication.
You can set communication address [ ADDR ] and commu- Visit our web site (www.autonics.com) to download C. Converter
nication speed [ BAUD ] for RS485 communication. communication manual and software [ Integrated device
management program: DAQMaster ].
D. Controller
Communication write enable/disable
[ Program mode: COmW ] Integrated device management program
E. Thyristor
( DAQMaster) unit
You can set to enable [ EnA ] or disable [ DIsA ] or writing
parameter setting by RS485 communication. DAQMaster is the integrated device management program
to set parameters and manage monitoring data. F. Pressure
transmitter
Communication specifications Visit our website (www.autonics.com) to download user
manual and integrated device management program. G. Temp.
transmitter
Item Specifications
< Computer specification for using software >
Communication
RS485 2-wire half duplex H. Accessories
method Item Minimum requirements
Communication IBM PC compatible computer with Intel
9600, 4800, 2400, 1200 System
speed(BPS) Pentium Ⅲ or above
Converter Converter built in RS232 Operating system Microsoft Windows 98/NT/XP/Vista/7
Max.
32 units Memory 256MB or more
connections
Communication Max. 1200m Hard disk More than 1GB of free hard disk space
distance (within 700m recommended)
Protocol MODBUS 1.1 RTU
Parity None Others RS-232 serial port(9-pin), USB port
Stop Bit 1Bit

Data length 8Bit < DAQMaster screen >
KN-1000B
KN-2000W
B-21
KN-2000W Series
Monitoring mode
RUN mode ※ 2. 1 : Moves digits / 4, 3: Changes SV.
※ 3. Press the MODE key after checking/changing SV in each parameter.
The value flashes twice and is saved. It moves to next parameter.
Press MODE key.
※ After entering setting group, press the MODE key for 3 sec. or there is no additional key
operation in 30 sec., it returns to RUN mode.
※1 ※2 ※Displayed only for alarm output models.

Alarm 1 value
S
AL1 09(9
MODE MODE ※3
Set each alarm value; [ AL-1 to AL-4 ] in program mode.

Alarm 2 value • Set range: Temperature sensor input → within temperature range
S
AL2 09(9 Analog input → L-SC to H-SC
MODE ※ When alarm mode [ AL-1 to AL-4 ] in program mode is
no alarm [ AT)_ ] or sensor break alarm [ SBa_ ], these parameters are
Alarm 3 value not displayed.
S ※ For 2EA alarm output model (KN-22 W), AL3, AL4 are not displayed.
AL3 00)1
MODE
Alarm 4 value
S
AL4 00)1
MODE
High peak value

S
hPEK ----
MODE
Displays high/low peak value.
Low peak value ※ High/Low peak value is available only to check and initialize it.
S (Refer to ‘High/Low peak monitoring’ for initialization.)
lPEK ---- ※ Initial high/low peak is saved after 2 sec. from supplying the power.
MODE
Program mode
RUN mode
※ 2. 1 : Moves digits / 4, 3: Changes SV.
※ 3. Press the MODE key after checking/changing SV in each parameter.
Press MODE key The value flashes twice and is saved. It moves to next parameter.
for 3 sec. ※ After entering setting group, press the MODE key for 3 sec. or there is no additional key
Input type ※1 ※2
S
IN-P aMA2 Select input type. (Refer to 「Input type and range」.)
MODE MODE ※3
※ Displayed only when selecting temperature sensor input type.

Temperature unit
S
MODE

Front display unit
S
Select front display unit.
dUNT ?/O
MODE
?/O OFF ?C ?F

S Set low limit of input range.
L-RG 0$00 • Set range : within analog input type range
MODE

H-RG 2)00
MODE
• Set range : within analog input type range
B-22
Multi Indicator
※Displayed only when selecting analog input type. A. Recorder
Decimal point
dP )0 B. Indicator
MODE )0 )00 )000 0
C. Converter
Low limit
scale value
L-SC 00)0 • Set range : -19999 to 19999
D. Controller
MODE
E. Thyristor
High limit unit
scale value
S Set high limit scale value.
H-SC 10)0 • Set range : -19999 to 19999
F. Pressure
MODE transmitter
G. Temp.
4 mA output ※ Displayed only for transmission output model. transmitter
scale value
S Set output scale value for 4 mA.
lOUT 00)0 • Set range : Temperature sensor input → within temperature range, H. Accessories
MODE
20 mA output
scale value Set output scale value for 20 mA.
S
hOUT 10)0 • Set range: Temperature sensor input → within temperature range,
MODE Analog input → L-SC to H-SC
Input and transmission ※Displayed only when selecting analog input type.
output extension
S Select extension range of 4-20 mA input and transmission output.
EX.I0 SP
MODE SP 10P 0P
※Displayed only for alarm output models.

AL1 mode
S
AL-1 AT!A KN-1000B
MODE
<Alarm mode> <Alarm option>
Set AL1 to S
AL4 alarm AL-1 AT!A AT!A KN-2000W
AL2 mode mode and MODE
MODE
S option.
AL-2 AT!A AL-2
MODE
AT@A AT!B
MODE
AL-3
MODE SBa_ AT!C
AL3 mode
S AL-4
AL-3 AT@A MODE AT)_ AT!D
MODE
Next parameter
※※ SV changing method of AL-2 to AL-4 is same as AL-1’s.

AL4 mode
S ※ For 2EA alarm output model (KN-22 W), AL3, AL4 are not
AL-4 AT@A displayed.
MODE ※ No alarm [ AT)_ ], sensor break alarm [ SBa_ ] do not have alarm option.
※ Set alarm value [ AL1 to AL4 ] in monitoring mode.
A-HY 001
• Set range : 001 to 999
MODE
※ When alarm mode [ AL-1 to AL-4 ] in program mode is no alarm [ AT)_ ] or
sensor break alarm [ SBa_ ], this parameter is not displayed.

S
Select input special function.
InSF LIN
MODE
LIN ROOT SQAR TUF
Input correction
IN-B 0000 • Set range : -999 to 999
MODE
B-23
KN-2000W Series
Digital filter
MAvF 04
MODE
• Set range : 01 to 16
Digital input terminal

S Select digital input function by no. 6 and 7.
DI-T HOLD ※ For the model without alarm output (KN-20 W), AlRE is not displayed.
MODE
HOLD ZERO AlRE

Digital input key
DI-K HOLD ※Press the 4, 3 keys for 3 sec. at the same time and it executes the selected function.
MODE
※ For the model without alarm output (KN-20 W), AlRE is not displayed.
HOLD ZERO AlRE
Display color
S Select display part color for RUN mode and error.
CLOR RED ※ Refer to「Display color」.
MODE
RED GRN YELO R--G G--R
※ Displayed only for alarm output models.

Alarm display color
S Select display part color for alarm.
C-AL RRRR ※ Refer to「Display color」.
MODE
Sensor break ※Displayed only for alarm, transmission output models.

alarm output
S Select output status when sensor disconnection.
BURN ON
MODE
ON OFF
※ Displayed only for RS485 communication output model.

Communication address
S Set communication address.
ADDR 01 • Set range : 01 to 99
MODE
Communication speed
S Select communication speed (baud rate).
BAUD (6K
MODE (6K 1(2K !2K @4K $8K
Communication write
S Select enable/disable to communication write.
COmW EnA (EnA:enable to write, DIsA:disable to write)
EnA DIsA
MODE
Lock
LOCK OFF
MODE OFF LOC1 LOC2
B-24
Multi Indicator
Monitoring mode
B. Indicator
AL1 09(9 AL3 00)1 hPEK ---- C. Converter
AL2 09(9 AL4 00)1 lPEK ----

D. Controller
Program mode
Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default E. Thyristor
unit
IN-P aMA2 lOUT 00)0 InSF LIN ADDR 01
UNIT ?C hOUT 10)0 IN-B 0000 BAUD (6K F. Pressure
transmitter
dUNT ?/O ExI0 5P MAuF 04 COMW EnA
G. Temp.
L-RG 0$00 AL-1 AT!A DI-T HOLD LOCK OFF transmitter
H-RG 2)00 AL-2 AT!A DI-K HOLD
dP )0 AL-3 AT@A CLOR RED H. Accessories
L-SC 00)0 AL-4 AT@A C-AL RRRR

H-SC 10)0 A-HY 001 BURN ON
Proper usage
Caution for using

(M3.5, min. 7.2 mm).
• The connection of this unit should be separated from
KN-1000B
inductive noise.
• Install a power switch or a circuit breaker to supply or
KN-2000W
cut off the power.
users for convenient control.
• Do not use this unit near the high frequency instruments
• When supplying input, if H H H H or LLLLis displayed,
and check the line.
• Installation environment.
① It shall be used indoor.
② Pollution Degree 2
③ Altitude max. 2,000 m
followed.
B-25
CN-6000 Series
Features
• Multi-input
·CN-610 (except CN-640 )
: Thermocouple 12 types, RTD 5 types,
Analog (mV, V, mA) 6 types
·CN-640 : 0 to 50.00 kHz
• Improves visibility with negative LCD
: 12 segment, 3 colors (selectable red, green, yellow)
• Displays input type and unit on display part
• Various outputs
: 4EA, 2EA, 1EA alarm output,
0-20 mA transmission output
(adjustable insulation, output range),
0-10 VDC voltage output
(adjustable insulation, output range)
: High/Low peak monitoring, sensor disconnection
alarm output (burn-out), input correction, user input Please read “Caution for your safety” in operation manual
range, display scale, transmission output scale,
analog output range setting
• Built-in power supply for sensor (24 VDC)
CN 6 10 0 C1
C1 Transmission output (0-20 mA) 1EA
C2 Transmission output (0-2 0mA) 2EA
V1 Transmission output (0-10 V) 1EA
Output
V2 Transmission output (0-10 V) 2EA
R1 Alarm output 1EA
R2 Alarm output 2EA
R4 Alarm output 4EA
Supply power 0 100-240 VAC 50 to 60 ㎐
1 24 VDC
Input 10 Universal input

40 Pulse input (※option)
Item
CN-6 Isolated Converter
Part descriptions
⑧ ① Display part (selectable red, green, yellow)
·Run mode: Displays current measured value.
·Parameter set mode: Displays parameters and SV.
② ②
② Unit display part (red)
①
③ Output scale Bar : For transmission output mode,
③ ④
displays output as % by scale bars.
④ Alarm output indicator: Turns ON when the alarm output is on.
⑥ ⑤ ( key: Used to enter parameter set mode, move to parameters,
⑤ ⑤ save SV and return to RUN mode.
⑥ 1, 4, 3 key: Used to change parameter SV.
⑦ ⑦ D.IN3 : Press the 4 and 3 keys for 3 sec. at the same time,
[ Transmission output model ] [ Alarm output model ] it operates the set function (alarm clear, display hold,
zero-point adjustment) at [DI-K].
⑧ Input type (only for CN-610 )
:Turns ON the selected temperature sensor type at [IN-P] pa-
rameter. (In case of thermocouple type, L, N, U, P types are not
displayed. In case of RTD type, RTD is displayed.)
(In case of thermocouple type, L, N, U, P types are not displayed.
In case of RTD type, RTD is displayed.)
C-2
Isolated Converter
■ CN-610 B. Indicator
● 8PIN
C. Converter
D. Controller
E. Thyristor
SOURCE unit
100-240VAC 50 to 60Hz,
24VDC F. Pressure
transmitter
※When using 2-wire transmitter,
short between no.4 and 5 terminals.
G. Temp.
transmitter
● 11PIN
H. Accessories
SOURCE
※When using 2-wire transmitter, 100-240VAC 50 to 60Hz,
short between no.6 and 4 terminals. 24VDC
■ CN-640 CN-6000
● 8PIN
Voltage
SOURCE
100-240VAC 50 to 60Hz,
24VDC
※ When inputting open collector to no. 3 and 5 terminals

for inputting contact, connect external resistance 10kΩ
(over 1/2W) to no.3 and 6 terminals.
● 11PIN
Voltage
SOURCE
100-240VAC 50 to 60Hz,
※ When inputting open collector to no. 5 and 4 terminals 24VDC
for inputting contact, connect external resistance
10kΩ(over 1/2W) to no.3 and 5 terminals.
C-3
CN-6000 Series
Specifications
Model CN-610 CN-640
AC voltage 100-240 VAC 50 to 60 Hz
Power supply
DC voltage 24 VDC
Power AC voltage Max. 8 VA
consumption DC voltage Max. 3 W
4digit : 12 Segment LCD Display (selectable red, green, yellow)
Display method
Graphic bar and Input/Unit display part (red)
Character size Display part : 6.4×11.0 mm (12 Segment), Input/Unit display part : 1.4×2.75 mm (unit)
RTD JPt100Ω, DPt100Ω, DPt50Ω, Cu50Ω, Cu100Ω
Thermocouple K, J, E, T, R, B, S, N, C, L, U, PLII
Input type • Voltage : -50.0-50.0 mV, -199.9-200.0 mV,
Analog -1.000-1.000 V, -1.00-10.00 V
• Current : 0.00-20.00 mA, 4.00-20.00 mA
Pulse input 0 to 50.00 kHz(input impedance 10 kΩ)
Transmission 0-20 mA(adjustable output range), load resistance max. 600 Ω (accuracy: ±0.3 F.S., resolutions: 8000)
output 0-10 VDC(adjustable output range), load resistance max. 10 kΩ (accuracy: ±0.3 F.S., resolutions: 8000)
Output
1-point : Relay contact capacity 250 VAC 5 A 1 a, 2-point : Relay contact capacity 250 VAC 3 A 1 c,
Alarm output
4-point : Relay contact capacity 250 VAC 5 A 1 a
±0.2%F.S. ±1digit (25±5 ℃), ±0.3%F.S. ±1digit (-10 to 20 ℃, 30 to 50 ℃)
Display accuracy ※CN-610 : For TC, the input below -100 ℃ is [±0.4%F.S.] ±1digit (TC-T, TC-U is max. ±2.0 ℃)
Setting method Set by front keys
Sampling cycle Analog input : 100 ms, Temperature sensor input : 250 ms
Same with pulse input cycle
Display cycle When pulse input cycle is over 10 sec., it is updated by
every 10 sec.
Dielectric voltage 2000 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min. (between input terminal and power terminal)
Ambient 10 to 50 ℃, storage : 20 to 60 ℃
temperature
Environment
Ambient
35 to 85%RH, storage : 35 to 85%RH
humidity
Approval
Unit weight Approx. 160 g Approx. 200 g
Dimensions
(unit:mm)
DIN35 Rail
35.2
80
85
50 80 20 3.3
● 8PIN socket ● 11PIN socket

8 8
2-Ø4.5
76
76
2-Ø4.5 2-Ø4.5
40
Min. 51
40 40
50 50
C-4
Isolated Converter
٧٧Input type selection switch B. Indicator
● 8PIN ● 11PIN
· mA : Select it for 0(4)-20 mA input C. Converter
· 10 V :Select it for -1 V-10 V input
· TC, RTD, mV, ±1V : Select it for RTD, TC temperature sensor or D. Controller
±1 V, mV input
※The pulse input model (CN-640 ) does not have this input type
E. Thyristor
selection switch. unit
F. Pressure
transmitter
• This product is multi-input. Select the desired input type by the input
type selection switch and select the input type at [ IN-P] parameter. G. Temp.
• The selection of the input type selection switch and that of [IN-P] transmitter
parameter should be same to display correct value. Factory default
is 4-20 mA. H. Accessories
■ CN-610 (universal input)

Input type Parameter Input range (℃) Input range (℉)
TcK1 200 to 1350 328 to 2462
K(CA)
TcK2 199.9 to 999.9 328 to 1832
J(IC) TC-J 199.9 to 800.0 328 to 1472
E(CR) TC-E 199.9 to 800.0 328 to 1472
T(CC) TC-T 199.9 to 400.0 199.9 to 752.0
B(PR) TC- B 400 to 1800 752 to 3272
Thermocouple R(PR) TC-R 0 to 1750 32 to 3182
S(PR) TC-S 0 to 1750 32 to 3182
N(NN) TC-N 200 to 1300 328 to 2372
CN-6000
C(W5) TC-C 0 to 2300 32 to 4172
L(IC) TC-L 199.9 to 900.0 328 to 1652
U(CC) TC-U 199.9 to 400.0 199.9 to 752.0
Platinel II TC-P 0 to 1390 32 to 2534
Cu50Ω Cu50 199.9 to 200.0 199.9 to 392.0
Cu100Ω Cu10 199.9 to 200.0 199.9 to 392.0
RTD JPt100Ω JPt1 199.9 to 600.0 328 to 1112
DPt50Ω DPt5 199.9 to 600.0 328 to 1112
DPt100Ω DPt1 199.9 to 850.0 328 to 1530
0.00 - 20.00 mA aMA1
Current
4.00 - 20.00 mA aMA2
50.0 - 50.0 mV aMV1 1999 to 9999
Analog (display range depends
199.9 - 200.0 mV aMV2 on the decimal point position)
Voltage
1.000 - 1.000 V A-V1
1.00 - 10.00 V A-V2
■ CN-640 (pulse input)

Input type Measuring cycle Parameter Range
0 to 9.999 Hz Max. 10 sec. 10H
0 to 99.99 Hz Max. 10 sec. 100H 1999 to 9999
Pulse 0 to 999.9 Hz Max. 10 sec. 1KH (display range is variable
according to decimal point position.)
0 to 9.999 kHz Max. 1 sec. 10KH
0 to 50.00 kHz Max. 0.1 sec. 50KH
※ Pulse input: Non-contact 0 to 50 kHz, Contact 0 to 45 Hz (displays 0 for below 0.1Hz)
※ Input Low Level : 0-1 VDC / Input High Level : 5-24 VDC
※ Duty Ratio : 30 to 70%
※ The principle of displaying frequency is converting the time difference between input pulses to the frequency. 1 sec. is required to
measure 1 Hz, and 10 sec. is required to measure 0.1 Hz. Therefore, it is normal that the lower pulse, the slower response speed. In
case of 0 Hz, if there are no pulses for over 2 sec., it is programmed to display 0 Hz to prevent slow response speed.
C-5
CN-6000 Series
Functions
■ Alarm [ AL-1, AL-2, AL-3, AL-4]

This product has 1 alarm or 2 or 4 alarms to operate individually when the value is too high or low. Alarm function is set by the
combination of alarm operation and alarm option.
To clear alarm, use digital input function (setting as AlRE for DI-K) or turn the power OFF and ON.
※For the model without alarm output (CN-6 -C1/C2/V1/V2), these parameters are not displayed.
AT!A
Alarm option
Alarm operation
٧٧Alarm operation
Mode Name Alarm operation Description
AT)_ ㅡ ㅡ No alarm operation
OFF H ON
AT! High limit alarm High limt alarm PV ≥ alarm temperature, alarm is ON
PV
value: 800℃
ON H OFF
AT@ ※1 Low limit alarm Low limt alarm PV ≤ alarm temperature, alarm is ON
PV
value:200℃
※ 1. Only for CN-610 . ※H : Alarm output hysteresis
٧٧Alarm option
AT .B Alarm latch
latched. (Holding the alarm output)
AT .C Standby sequence When power is ON and it is an alarm condition, it is ignored. From the second alarm condition,
Alarm latch and
AT .D When power is ON and it is an alarm condition, it is ignored. From the second alarm condition,
standby sequence
■ Alarm output hysteresis ■ High/Low peak monitoring

[Program mode : A-HY] [Monitoring mode: hPEK, lPEK]
Set the interval of ON/OFF alarm output. This function is to save high/low peak to check the invisible
The set hysteresis is applied to AL1 to AL4 and it is as abnormal condition of system at [ hPEK] or [ lPEK] in
below. monitoring mode.
※Ex) A-HY 4, high limit alarm value: 800, When the high/low peak is out of the temperature range,
it displays HHHH or LLLL.
low limit alarm value: 200
To initialize high/low peak, press the 4, 3 keys at the
same time for 3 sec. at [ hPEK] or [ lPEK] .
High limit
alarm value A-HY:4 In this case, peak value is the present input value.
800
■ Error
800 796 LLLL sensor input is lower than the
When input is
ON OFF temperature range. moved within the
Flashes when measured sen- temperature range,
HHHH sor input is higher than the it is cleared.
temperature range
Low limit A-HY:4
alarm value
※1
Flashes when the sensor is Check temperature
BURN break or not connected. sensor connection.
200
Flashes when there is error to Check set conditions
ERR SV. and re-set it.
Flashes when [ IN-P] setting
200 204
ERR2 and input type selection switch Check input type.
ON OFF
setting are not same.
※ 1. Only for CN-610 .
C-6
Isolated Converter
■ Parameter initialization Display scale function is able to change display value for
max./min. measured input by setting high limit scale A. Recorder
To initialize all parameter as factory default, press the [H-SC] and low limit scale [L-SC] in program mode.
( and 1 keys at the same time in RUN mode and it ※Ex) Set high/low scale value (input range is 0 to 10V) B. Indicator
enters initialization parameter.
• L-SC= )00
RUN mode • H-SC= %00, 1)00, 1%00, `)00 C. Converter
Press the ( + 1 keys Display value
at the same time.
INIT 1%00 D. Controller
1)00
%00 E. Thyristor
3 unit
NO 4 YES 0
Input value
10V
F. Pressure
( transmitter
`)00
Completes initialization.
※ Parameter initialization is available only when lock G. Temp.
transmitter
[ LOCK] is set as OFF. • L-SC=1)00, H-SC= `)00
Display value H. Accessories
■ Temperature unit [Program mode : UNIT]
1%00
Temperature unit (℃/℉) is selectable. When changing
1)00
temperature unit, user input range, display scale, output
scale, alarm SV are initialized. You should set the
parameters again for your purpose. Input value
0 10V
※ When selecting analog input, this parameter [ UNIT] is
not displayed. `)00
■ Front display unit [Program mode : dUNT]

• When selecting analog input, select the unit (mV, V, mA, • L-SC=-%00, H-SC= %00
A, ℃, ℉, %)of display value.(CN-610 ) Display value
• When selecting pulse input, select the unit (kHz, Hz, %) 1%00
of display value. (CN-640 )
1)00
• When not displaying unit, set OFFand it turns OFF all %00
indicators. CN-6000
Input value
0 10V
■ User input range -%00
[Program mode : L-RG, H-RG]
When selecting analog input, you can set the input range
for your purpose. Set low limit input value [ L-RG] and ※ When changing input type, high/low scale is changed as
high limit input value [ H-RG] to limit the input range. factory default.
• Set conditions :
Low limit input value [ L-RG] +20% F.S. < High limit
input value [ H-RG] ■ Input correction [Program mode: IN-B]
■ Decimal point [Program mode: dP] This function is to correct the error occurring from a
thermocouple, a RTD or analog input out of allowable
It is able to change decimal point position for high/low limit
error range of this unit.
scale value. It changes decimal point position of display
value. This is also available to correct error when a sensor
■ Display scale [Program mode: L-SC, H-SC] temperature.
For analog input, this function is to set ( 1999 to 9999)for Variable temperature sensors have accuracy level.
particular high/low limit value in order to display high/low Because high accuracy type is expansive, standard
limit value of measurement input. If measurement inputs thermocouples are generally used.
are ‘a’ and ‘b’ and particular values are ‘A’ and ‘B’, it will In this case, temperature sensor may occur error. By
display a=A, b=B as below graphs. executing this function, you can get more accurate
Display Display temperature.
Display value B value
value B When executing input correction function, you should
B measure the error from a sensor accurately. If the
A measured error is not correct, error may be greater.
A
a b Ex)When measured temperature is 4 ℃ and actual
a b a b A
Input Input temperature is 0 ℃. Set IN-B as -4, and display
Input value value
value value is 0 ℃.
Display Display Display
value value value A
a b
B a b
A
A
a b B B
Input Input Input
value value value
C-7
CN-6000 Series
■ Transmission output range ■ Input special function [Program mode: InSF]
[Program mode: lOR , hOR ] When selecting analog input, this function is to display the
Transmission output scale calculated actual value by square, root (√), or two unit
[Program mode: lOU , hOU ] function (TUF) as display value.
This function is to set output scale and range for display
Parameter Functions Graph Applications
value for transmission output.
Display
When the input value set at lOU1/ lOU2 is displayed, Y = AX + B Standard
Outputs
the output value set at lOR1/ lOR2 is transmitted. characteristics.
LIN as input Input for
Input
When the input value set at hOU1/hOU2 is displayed, value
linearity.
the output value set at hOR1/ hOR2 is transmitted.
Outputs Display
Output Output
the
Y = A( X ) + B Used for
(X ≥ 0)
rooted measuring flows
ROOT Y=0(X < 0)
by pressure
(√) input Input signal.
value
Display Display Outputs Display Used for
Y = A(X)2 + B
the (X > 0) outputting
※Relation among input range, user input range, display SQAR squared Input differential
input Y = -A(X)2 + B pressure by flow
scale, transmission scale, and output range
value (X < 0) signal.
The below figure is the example for 4 to 20 mA input and
0-20 mA transmission output. TUF Refer to ‘Two unit function’
※Display value and mA output value for SQAR:
Input range
Input value - L-RG 2×(
Display value={( ) H-SC-L-SC)} + L-SC
User
input range ※Display value and mA output value for ROOT:
(6 mA to 16 mA)
Input value - L-RG
Display value={( )×( H-SC-L-SC)} + L-SC
Display scale H-RG - L-RG
(0 to 1000) (output value)
٧٧Two Unit Function [ TUF]

Output scale
When connecting a pressure sensor, compound
pressure which is below atmospheric pressure (0) is for
vacuum as mmHg and which is atmospheric pressure
Output range or over it is for positive pressure as kg/cm2.
4 mA 20 mA Atmospheric pressure is 0kg/cm2 . When this unit
does not display 0kg/cm2 , you can correct zero-point
When display value is 100, it outputs 4 mA. adjustment function.
When display value is 900, it outputs 20 mA.
When using two unit function, L-SC is fixed as -760.
L-SC parameter is displayed but you cannot set this.
■ Bar display channel You can set H-SC within 0 to 9999 range.
[Program mode: BAR, User level: HIGH]
This function is to select OUT1 or OUT2 for Bar display of ■ Atmospheric pressure (0) setting
transmission output scale. for Two Unit Function
※ Only for the model which has two transmission outputs [Program mode: )PSI, InSF: TUF]
(CN-6 -C2/V2), this parameter is displayed. This function is to set analog input value for atmospheric
pressure (0) at analog input range.
■ Input and transmission output extension Ex) When pressure range is 760.0 mmHg to 3.000 kg/
[Program mode : ExIO] cm2 , and pressure transmitter outputs 4-20 mA and
it outputs 8.00 mA for atmospheric pressure (0), set
This function is to extend analog input and 4 to 20 mA, input special function as TUF, H-SC: 3000, dP:
0-10 VDC transmission output to 5% or 10% range. )000, )PSI: 0800. This unit displays for 4 mA input
The below table is the case of 4 to 20 mA transmission as -760, for 8 mA input as )000 and 20 mA input
output range setting. as #000.
Mode Operation
Display
Outputs 4 to 20 mA within analog input
0P range.
5P analog input range.
Outputs 2.4 to 21.6 mA for 10% out of the Input
10P analog input range. 8 mA
※ This parameter is not displayed for not transmission

output (4-20 mA, 0-10 V) model, or for selecting
※ Below 0 mA, 0 VDC cannot extend.
※ ±1 VDC, 10 VDC input are available to extend only 5%. ※This function is only for CN-610 .
C-8
Isolated Converter
■ Span correction ■ Digital input [Program mode: DI-K]

A. Recorder
[Program mode: SPAN, User level: HIGH]
By front digital input keys (D.IN3: 4 + 3 for 3 sec.), one of
It corrects the error of display value for 100% input. three functions executes as the below table.
B. Indicator
• Set range : 0.900 to 1.100 Function Operaiton
Output
※ When alarm is ON in RUN mode, it
C. Converter
clears alarm forcibly. (It applies only for
alarm latch, alarm latch and standby
sequence options.)
D. Controller
※ Alarm clear operates only when the
Alarm
AlRE clear
value is out of the alarm value range.
E. Thyristor
After clearing alarm, alarm operates its
unit
Input option normally.
0.00 kgf/cm2 10.00 kgf/cm2 ※ For the model without alarm output F. Pressure
(CN-6 -C1/C2/V1/V2), this transmitter
parameter is not displayed.
■ Digital filter G. Temp.
Temporarily indicated value is stopped in
[Program mode: AvF/ MAvF, User level: HIGH] Display transmitter
HOLD HOLD
order to confirm indicated value in unstable
Digital filter is able to stably display and output the noise input.
H. Accessories
from input line and irregular signals. Set preset display value as 0.
Normal average filter AvF displays the averaged Zero- This function is related with input
point correction [ IN-B]. When executing zero
N times of input values periodically. Moving average ZERO adjust- adjustment function in display value as
filter MAvFdisplays the moving averaged N times of input
ment 4, input correction value IN-B is set -4
values in real time.
automatically.
• Filter set range : 01 to 16
※When setting as 01, digital filter function does not run.
■ Display color [Program mode: CLOR]
100ms This function is to change display color for occurring error,
operating alarm automatically. User can check the status
of this unit directly.
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 ※ Color of monitoring mode, program mode is red.
٧٧EVENT: When occurring alarm and
Sn: Sampling value displaying HHHH, LLLL, BURN, ERR
Dn: Display value
Parameter Display color CN-6000
SV RUN EVENT
RED Red Red
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
GRN Green Green
D1=S1, D2=S2, D3=S3 YELO Yellow Yellow
: Initial operation before averaging 4 R--G Red Green
S1+S2+S3+S4 S2+S3+S4+S5 G--R Green Red
D4= D5=
4 4
S3+S4+S5+S6 S4+S5+S6+S7 ■ Alarm output for disconnecting input sensor
D6= D7=
4 4 [Program mode: BURN]
S5+S6+S7+S8 When disconnecting input sensor, you can set the status
D8= of transmission output.
4
It flashes BURN and it outputs the set value of HHHH or
LLLL.
For transmission output, it outputs the set max./min. value
of I/O expansion function.
Transmission
Parameter SV Alarm output
output (4-20 mA)
High limit Low limit
ON 20 mA
alarm ON alarm OFF
BURN
High limit Low limit
OFF 4 mA
alarm OFF alarm ON
■ Lock [Program mode: LOCK]

OFF LOC1 LOC2

Program mode
Monitoring mode
: Enable to check/set
: Enable to check, disable to set,
: Disable to check
※ In LOC2, only LOCK parameter displays in program
mode.
C-9
CN-6000 Series
Monitoring mode
※ 3. Press the key after checking/changing SV in each parameter.
Press MODE key. ※ After entering setting group, press the key for 3 sec. or there is no additional key
※ This parameter might not be displayed depending on other parameter settings.
※1 ※2 ※Displays only for the transmission output model.

1CH output value
S
OUT1 ----
MODE MODE ※3
Displays output value by each channel.

2CH output value
S
OUT2 ----
MODE
※Displayed only for alarm output model.

Alarm 1 value
S
AL1 10)0
MODE
Alarm 2 value
S Set each alarm value; [ AL-1 to AL-4] in program mode.
AL2 00)0
MODE · Set range: Temperature sensor input → within temperature range
※ When alarm operation[ AL-1 to AL-4] in program mode is
Alarm 3 value no alarm [ AT)_] or sensor disconnection alarm [ SBa_], these
S parameters are not displayed.
AL3 10)0
MODE ※ For 1EA (CN-6 -R1) or 2EA (CN-6 -R2) alarm models,
AL3, AL4 are not displayed.
Alarm 4 value
S
AL4 00)0
MODE
High peak value

S
hPEK ----
MODE Displays high/low peak value.
※High/Low peak value is available only to check and initialize it.
(Refer to ‘High/Low peak monitoring’ for initialization.)
Low peak value
S ※ Initial high/low peak is saved after 2 sec. from supplying the power.
lPEK ----
MODE
C-10
Isolated Converter
Program mode A. Recorder

※ 1. S :Press any key among the 1, 3, 4. B. Indicator
Press MODE key ※ 3. Press the key after checking/changing SV in each parameter. C. Converter
for 3 sec. The value flashes twice and is saved. It moves to next parameter.
※ After entering setting group, press the key for 3 sec. or there is no additional
key operation in 30 sec., it returns to RUN mode. D. Controller
Input type ※1 ※2 E. Thyristor
S unit
IN-P aMA2 Select input type. (Refer to「Input type and range」.)
MODE MODE ※3 F. Pressure
transmitter
※Displayed only when selecting temperature sensor input type.
Temperature unit G. Temp.
S transmitter
MODE
H. Accessories
Display unit ※Displayed only when selecting analog input type.

S Select front display unit.
dUNT ?/O
MODE
?/O OFF MV V MA ?C ?F

S
Set low limit of input range.
L-RG 0$00 · Set range : within analog input type range
MODE

H-RG 2)00 · Set range : within analog input type range
MODE
Decimal point CN-6000

dP )0
MODE )0 )00 )000 0
Low limit
scale value
L-SC 00)0 · Set range : -1999 to 9999
MODE
High limit
scale value
H-SC 10)0 · Set range : -1999 to 9999
MODE
Input correction
IN-B 000 · Set range : -999 to 999
MODE
※Displays only for the transmission output model.

Transmission output 1
low-limit
S Set low limit value of transmission output 1.
lOR1 0$00 · Set range : Current output → 0-20 mA, Voltage output → 0-10 VDC
MODE
high-limit
S Set high limit value of transmission output 1.
hOR1 2)00 · Set range : Current output → 0-20 mA, Voltage output → 0-10 VDC
MODE
low-limit
S Set low limit value of transmission output 2.
lOR2 0$00 · Set range : Current output → 0-20 mA, Voltage output → 0-10 VDC
MODE
high-limit
S Set high limit value of transmission output 2.
MODE
C-11
CN-6000 Series
※Displays only for the transmission output model.
Bar display CH
S Select the channel for Bar display.
BAR OUT1 ※Displayed only when selecting user level [ USER] as HIGH.
MODE
OUT1 OUT2
low-limit scale
S Set low limit scale value of transmission output 1.
lOU1 00)0 · Set range : Temperature sensor input → within temperature range,
high-limit scale
S Set high limit scale value of transmission output 1.
hOU1 10)0 · Set range : Temperature sensor input → within temperature range,
low-limit scale Set low limit scale value of transmission output 2.
S
lOU2 00)0 · Set range : Temperature sensor input → within temperature range,
high-limit scale Set high limit scale value of transmission output 2.
S
hOU2 10)0 · Set range : Temperature sensor input → within temperature range,

※Displayed only for transmission output models with selecting analog input type.
output extension
S Select extension range of analog input and transmission output.
EX.IO SP ※Displayed only when selecting user level [ USER] as HIGH.
MODE
SP 10P 0P

AL1 mode
S
AL-1 AT!A
MODE Set AL1 to <Alarm operation> <Alarm option>
AL4 alarm S
AL2 mode operation AT!A AT!A
AL-1
S and option.
AL-2 AT@A MODE
MODE
MODE AL-2 AT@A AT!B

MODE
AL3 mode AL-3 SBa_ AT!C

S MODE
AL-3 AT!A AL-4

MODE MODE AT)_ AT!D
Next parameter
AL4 mode ※SV changing method of AL-2 to AL-4 is same as AL-1’s.
S
AL-4 AT@A ※ For 1EA (CN-610 -R1) or 2EA (CN-610 -R2) alarm models,
MODE AL-3, AL-4 are not displayed.
※ No alarm [ AT)_], sensor break alarm [ SBa_] do not have alarm
option.
※ Set alarm value [ AL1 to AL4] in monitoring mode.
A-HY 001 · Set range : 001 to 999
MODE
※ When alarm operation[ AL-1 to AL-4] in program mode is no alarm [ AT)_] or
sensor disconnection alarm [ SBa_], this parameter is not displayed.

S
InSF LIN Select input special function.
MODE
LIN ROOT SQAR TUF
C-12
Isolated Converter
Atmospheric pressure
S A. Recorder
Set analog input value for atmospheric pressure (0) at Two Unit Function.
)PSI 0*00 · Set range : L-RG to H-RG
MODE
※Displayed when setting input special function [ InSF] as TUF.
B. Indicator
Span correction
S Correct the error of display value for 100% input. C. Converter
SPAN !000 · Set range :0.900 to 1.100
MODE
※Displayed only when selecting user level [ USER] as HIGH.
D. Controller
Normal average
digital filter
S Set the number of normal average digital filters. E. Thyristor
AvF 01 · Set range : 01 to 16
unit
MODE
※Displayed only when selecting user level [ USER] as HIGH. F. Pressure
transmitter
Moving average
digital filter
S Set the number of moving average digital filters. G. Temp.
MAvF 04 · Set range : 01 to 16 transmitter
MODE
H. Accessories
Digital input key Select digital input function by front keys.
S
DI-K HOLD ※ Press 3, 4 keys for 3 sec. at the same time and
MODE
it executes the selected function.
※ For the model without alarm output (CN-610 -C1/C2/V1/V2),
AlRE is not displayed.
HOLD ZERO AlRE

Display color
COLR GRN
MODE
※Refer to 「Display color」.
GRN YELO R--G G--R RED
Sensor break ※Displayed only when selecting temperature sensor input type.
alarm output CN-6000
S
Select output status when sensor disconnection.
BURN ON
MODE
ON OFF
User level
S Select user level.
USER STND
MODE STND HIGH
Lock
LOCK OFF
MODE
OFF LOC1 LOC2
C-13
CN-6000 Series
※ 3. Press the key after checking/changing SV in each parameter.
Press MODE key The value flashes twice and is saved. It moves to next parameter.
for 3 sec. ※ After entering setting group, press the key for 3 sec. or there is no additional
key operation in 30 sec., it returns to RUN mode.
※1
Input type ※2
S
IN-P 50KH Select input type. (Refer to 「Input type and range」.)
MODE MODE ※3
Display unit
S Select front display unit.
dUNT KHZ
MODE
KHZ HZ ?/O OFF

S
Set low limit of input range.
L-RG 0)00 · Set range : within input type range
MODE

H-RG 5)00 · Set range : within input type range
MODE
Decimal point
dP )00
MODE
)0 )00 )000 0
Low limit scale value
L-SC 0)00 · Set range : -1999 to 9999
MODE
High limit scale value

H-SC 5)00 · Set range : -1999 to 9999
MODE
Input correction
IN-B 000 · Set range : -999 to 999
MODE
Transmission output 1 ※Displays only for the transmission output model.

low-limit
lOR1 0)00 · Set range : Current output → 0-20 mA, Voltage output → 0-10 VDC
MODE
high-limit
MODE
low-limit
lOR2 0)00 · Set range : Current output → 0-20 mA, Voltage output → 0-10 VDC
MODE
high-limit
MODE
Bar display CH
S Select the channel for Bar display.
BAR OUT1 ※Displayed only when selecting user level [ USER] as HIGH.
MODE
OUT1 OUT2
C-14
Isolated Converter
Transmission output 1 ※Displays only for the transmission output model. A. Recorder
low-limit scale
lOU1 0)00 · Set range : L-SC to H-SC
MODE B. Indicator
high-limit scale
S Set high limit scale value of transmission output 1. C. Converter
hOU1 5)00 · Set range : L-SC to H-SC
MODE
D. Controller
low-limit scale
lOU2 0)00 · Set range : L-SC to H-SC
E. Thyristor
unit
MODE
Transmission output 2 F. Pressure

high-limit scale transmitter
hOU2 5)00 · Set range : L-SC to H-SC G. Temp.
MODE
transmitter
output extension Select extension range of analog input
S
EX.IO SP and transmission output. SP 10P 0P H. Accessories
MODE

AL1 mode
S
<Alarm operation>
AL-1 AT!A S
<Alarm option>
MODE Set AL1 to AT!A AT!A
AL-1
AL4 alarm MODE
AL2 mode MODE
operation
S AL-2 AT!B
AL-2 AT@A and option. AT@A
MODE
MODE
AL-3 SBa_ AT!C
MODE
AL3 mode
S
AL-3 AT!A AL-4
MODE AT)_ AT!D
MODE
Next parameter CN-6000
AL4 mode ※SV changing method of AL-2 to AL-4 is same as AL-1’s.
S
AL-4 AT@A ※ For 1EA (CN-640 -R1) or 2EA (CN-640 -R2) alarm models,
MODE
AL-3, AL-4 are not displayed.
※ No alarm [ AT)_], sensor break alarm [ SBa_] do not have alarm
option.
AL output hysteresis ※ Set alarm value [ AL1 to AL4] in monitoring mode.
A-HY 001 · Set range : 001 to 999
MODE ※ When alarm operation [ AL-1 to AL-4] in program mode is no alarm [ AT)_]
or sensor disconnection alarm [ SBa_], this parameter is not displayed.
Span correction
S Correct the error of display value for 100% input.
SPAN !000 ·Set range : 0.900 to 1.100
MODE ※Displayed only when selecting user level [ USER] as HIGH.
Moving average
digital filter
MAvF 04 ·Set range : 01 to 16
MODE ※Displayed only when selecting user level [ USER] as HIGH.
Digital input key

DI-K HOLD ※Press the 3, 4 keys for 3 sec. at the same time and it executes the selected function.
MODE ※ For the model without alarm output (CN-640 -C1/C2/V1/V2), AlRE is not displayed.
HOLD ZERO AlRE

Display color
COLR GRN ※Refer to「Display color」.
MODE
GRN YELO R--G G--R RED
User level
S
USER STND Select user level. STND HIGH
MODE
Lock
S
LOCK OFF Select lock function. OFF LOC1 LOC2
MODE
C-15
CN-6000 Series
Factory default

٧٧Monitoring mode
OUT1 ---- AL1 10)0 AL3 10)0 hPEK ----
OUT2 ---- AL2 00)0 AL4 00)0 lPEK ----
٧٧Program mode
IN-P aMA2 lOR1 0$00※1 0)00※２ ExIO 5P SPAN !000
UNIT ?C hOR1 2)00 ※1 1)00 ※２ AL-1 AT!A AvF 01
dUNT ?/O lOR2 0$00※1 0)00※２ AL-2 AT@A MAvF 04
L-RG 0$00 hOR2 2)00※1 1)00※２ AL-3 AT!A DI-K HOLD
H-RG 2)00 BAR OUT1 AL-4 AT@A COLR GRN
dP )0 lOU1 00)0 A-HY 001 BURN ON
L-SC 00)0 hOU1 10)0 InSF LIN USER STND
H-SC 10)0 lOU2 00)0 )PSI 0*00 LOCK OFF
IN-B 000 hOU2 10)0
※ 1. Displayed only for current transmission output, alarm output model (CN-610 -C1/C2/R1/R2/R4).
※ 2. Displayed only for voltage transmission output model (CN-610 -V1/V2).

٧٧Monitoring mode
OUT1 ---- AL1 00)0 AL3 10)0 hPEK ----
OUT2 ---- AL2 00)0 AL4 10)0 lPEK ----
٧٧Program mode
IN-P 50KH lOR1 0)00 hOU2 5)00 MAvF 04
dUNT KHZ hOR1 1)00 ExIO 5P DI-K HOLD
L-RG 0)00 lOR2 0)00 AL-1 AT!A COLR GRN
H-RG 5)00 hOR2 1)00 AL-2 AT!A USER STND
dP )00 BAR OUT1 AL-3 AT!A LOCK OFF
L-SC 0)00 lOU1 0)00 AL-4 AT!A
H-SC 5)00 hOU1 5)00 A-HY 001
IN-B 000 lOU2 0)00 SPAN !000
Proper usage
■ Caution for using

• For connecting the power, use a crimp terminal (M3.5, min. • When supplying input, if HHHH or LLLLis displayed,
7.2 mm). measured input may have problem. Turn off the power and
• The connection of this unit should be separated from check the line.
the power line and high voltage line in order to prevent • Installation environment
inductive noise. ① It shall be used indoors.
• Install a power switch or a circuit breaker to supply or cut ② Pollution degree 2
off the power. ③ Altitude max. 2,000m
• Switch or circuit breaker should be installed nearby users ④ Installation category Ⅱ
for convenient control. • It may cause malfunction if above instructions are not
• Do not use this unit near the high frequency instruments followed.
(high frequency welding machine & sewing machine, large
capacity SCR controller).
C-16
Isolated Converter
A. Recorder
B. Indicator
C. Converter
D. Controller
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
H. Accessories
CN-6000
C-17
KPN Series
Features
• Super high-speed sampling cycle

(10 times faster compared to existing models)
: 50 ms sampling cycle and ±0.3% display accuracy
• Improved visibility with wide display and high lumi-
nance LED
• Easy check control output MV with Bar graph
• High performance control with heating/cooling control
and automatic/manual control modes
• PC parameter setting
(via USB and RS485 communication)
: Integrated device management program
(DAQMaster) supported
※ Communication converter, sold separately:
SCM-WF48 (Wi-Fi to RS485, USB converter)
SCM-US48I (USB to RS485 converter),
SCM-38I (RS232C to RS485 converter),
SCM-US (USB to Serial converter), Please read “Caution for your safety” in operation manual
• Selectable SSR output or current output before using this unit.
• Heater disconnection alarm (CT input) function

※ CT, sold separately: CSTC-E80LN, CSTC-E200LN
• Multi-SV (up to 4) setting (selectable by digital input
terminal)
• Space saving with compact design: downsized by
38% depth-based (panel rear length: 60 mm)
• Terminal cover, sold separately: R A-COVER
• Multi-input/Multi-range
Manual
• For more information and instructions, refer to the user manual and the user manual for communication.
• The user manual includes product specifications, functions, and operations.
• The user manual for communication includes information about Modbus RTU protocol, and Modbus mapping table.
DAQMaster is the integrated device management program to set parameters and manage monitoring data and user group,
parameter mask which are the dedicated function of KPN.
Visit our website (www.autonics.com) to download user manual and integrated device management program.
D-2
High Performance & Accuracy Process Controller
Ordering information A. Recorder
KPN5 5 0 0 0 0 0 B. Indicator
Power supply
0 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz C. Converter
Option input/output 0 None

3 Transmission output + Remote SV D. Controller
Option communication output 0 None

E. Thyristor
2 RS485 unit
1 output
0 Relay, Current, SSR drive voltage selection output F. Pressure
type
transmitter
OUT1: Current, SSR drive voltage selection output
1
Control output※1
G. Temp.
OUT1: Current, SSR drive voltage selection output transmitter
3
2 output OUT2: Relay output
type OUT1: Relay output
7 H. Accessories
OUT1: Relay output
9
OUT2: Relay output
The number of control outputs 0 1 output type (Heating or Cooling type)
1 2 output type (Heating&Cooling type)
Size 3 DIN W48×H96 mm

5 DIN W96×H96 mm
Item
KPN5 Temperature / Process Controller
※ 1: The 1 output type is heating or cooling output type and the 2 output type is heating & cooling output type.
The 1 output type is able to use only one output among relay, current, SSR drive voltage outputs.
OUT1 of the 2 output type is fixed as heating output and OUT2 of the 2 output type is fixed as cooling output.
If you select the SSR drive voltage or current output model, you can select the appropriate control output.
KPN
Connections
٧٧KPN5 00
Communication 1 RS485
13 Remote SV
RS485(A+) ADC
Output Circuit V mA 1-5V
RS485 2 14 4-20mA
RS485(B-)
AL1 OUT Relay 3 15

250VAC 3A 1a
DI-1
Digital
RESISTIVE LOAD Input
AL2 OUT Relay 4 16 Non-contact,
Control
DI-2
250VAC 3A 1a Circuit contact input

RESISTIVE LOAD 5 17
AL3 OUT Relay ٧٧KPN5 1
250VAC 3A 1a
※1 RESISTIVE LOAD 6 18 Analog Output ※2
Output
Circuit
mA DC4-20mA(Trans. output)/
OUT1 Relay 24VDC(LPS)
250VAC 5A 1a 7 19 7 OUT2 Relay
RESISTIVE LOAD mA V 250VAC 5A 1a
RESISTIVE LOAD
Current SSR 8 20 Current Current SSR 8
DC0/4-20mA 11VDC±2V CT Transformer
Output ADC DC0/4-20mA 11VDC±2V
Load 500ΩMax. 20mA Max. Load 500ΩMax. 20mA Max.
Circuit 0.0-50.0A
9 21 9 OUT1 Relay
mA V mA V 250VAC 5A 1a
A RESISTIVE LOAD
10 22 Analog 10
0-100mV
B mA 0-5V
SOURCE 11 ADC 23 1-5V
100-240VAC, Power V
0-10V
Circuit B'
50/60Hz 12 24 0-20mA
RTD TC 4-20mA
Sensor ※2: OUT1, OUT2
※1:Set relay output [ RLY], current [ CUR], or Model OUT1 control output OUT2 control output
SSR drive voltage output [ SSR] at OUT1 Current, SSR drive voltage Current, SSR drive voltage
KPN5 11
control output [ OUT1] in parameter 3 group. selection output selection output
Current, SSR drive voltage
※ Standard model has shaded terminals only. KPN5 13 Relay output
selection output
is option specification.
Current, SSR drive voltage
KPN5 17 Relay output
selection output
KPN5 19 Relay output Relay output
D-3
KPN Series
Specifications
Series KPN53 KPN55

Power supply 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Max. 15 VA
Display method 7Segment(red, green), control Bar graph: red, green
Character PV(W×H) 7.0×14.6 mm 11.0×22.0 mm

size SV(W×H) 6.0×12.0 mm 6.0×12.0 mm
RTD JPt100Ω, DPt100Ω, DPt50Ω, Cu100Ω, Cu50Ω, Nikel120Ω(6 types)
Input type TC K, J, E, T, L, N, U, R, S, B, C, G, PLII(13 types)
Analog ㆍVoltage: 0-100 mV, 0-5 V, 1-5 V, 0-10 V(4 types) ㆍCurrent: 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA(2 types)
RTD ㆍAt room temperature (23±5 ℃): (PV ±0.3% or ±1 ℃, select the higher one) ±1digit ※1
Display TC ㆍOut of room temperature range: (PV ±0.5% or ±2 ℃, select the higher one) ±1digit
accuracy Analog At room temperature (23±5 ℃): ±0.3% F.S.±1digit, Out of room temperature range: ±0.5% F.S.±1digit
CT input ±5% F.S.±1digit
Relay OUT1, OUT2 : 250 VAC 5 A 1 a
Control
SSR Max. 11 VDC±2 V 20 mA
output
Current 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA selectable (max. load 500 Ω)
Alarm
Relay AL1, AL2, AL3 Relay contact capacity 250 VAC 3 A 1 a
output
Option Transmission 4-20 mA (Load max. 600 Ω, output accuracy: ±0.3% F.S.±1digit)
output Communication RS485 communication output (Modbus RTU method)
CT 0.0-50.0 A(primary heater current value measuring range) ※CT ratio is 1/1000
Option Remote SV 1-5 VDC or 4-20 mA(current input: using external resistance 250 Ω)
input
ㆍContact input: Max. 2 kΩ in ON, Min. 90 kΩ in ON
Digital input
ㆍNon-contact input: Residual voltage max. 1.0 V in ON, leakage current max. 0.1 mA in OFF
Control Heating, Cooling

ON/OFF control, P, PI, PD, PID control
type Heating&Cooling
Hysteresis ㆍThermocouple/RTD: 1 to 100 ℃/℉(0.1 to 100.0 ℃/℉) variable ㆍAnalog: 1 to 100 digit
Proportional band (P) 0.1 to 999.9 ℃(0.1 to 999.9%)
Integral time(I) 0 to 9999 sec.
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 sec.
Control period(T) 0.1 to 120.0 sec.(relay output, SSR drive voltage output only)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0%
Sampling period 50 ms
Dielectric strength 2000 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min. (between input terminal and power source terminal)
Vibration 0.75 mm amplitude at frequency of 5 to 55 Hz (for 1 min.) in each X, Y, Z direction for 2 hours
Relay Mechanical Over 10,000,000 operations

life cycle Electrical Over 100,000 operations (250 VAC 3 A resistance load)
Insulation resistance Over 100 MΩ at 500 VDC megger)
Noise resistance Square shaped noise by noise simulator (pulse width 1㎲) ±2 kV R-phase, S-phase
Memory retention Approx. 10 years (when using non-volatile semiconductor memory type)
Ambient tempera-
Environ- -10 to 50 ℃, storage: -20 to 60 ℃
ture
ment
Ambient humidity 35 to 85%RH, storage: 35 to 85%RH
Protection IP65(front part)
Double insulation or reinforced insulation
Insulation type
(mark: , dielectric strength between the measuring input part and the power part: 1kV)
Unit weight Approx. 160 g Approx. 220 g
※1. ◎ At room temperature (23 ℃±5 ℃)
ㆍTC K, J, T, N, E type, below -100 ℃ / L, U, PLⅡ, RTD Cu50, DPt50: (PV ±0.3% or ±2 ℃, select the higher one) ±1digit
ㆍTC C, G and R, S type, below 200 ℃: (PV ±0.3% or ±3 ℃, select the higher one) ±1digit
ㆍTC B type, below 400 ℃, there is no accuracy standards.
◎ Out of room temperature range
ㆍRTD Cu50, DPt50: (PV 0.5% or ±3 ℃, select the higher one) ±1digit
ㆍRTD R, S, B, C, G: (PV ±0.5% or ±10 ℃, select the higher one) ±1digit
ㆍOther sensors: Below -100 ℃, within ±5 ℃
D-4
Part descriptions A. Recorder
① Measured value(PV) display part

B. Indicator
ㆍRUN mode: Displays currently measured value (PV).
ㆍSet mode: Displays the parameters.
C. Converter
① ② Set value (SV) display part
⑤ ㆍRUN mode: Displays the set value (SV).
⑥ ③ ㆍSet mode: Displays the set value of the parameter. D. Controller
⑦ ④
⑧ ③ Unit(℃/℉/%) indicator: Displays the unit set at display unit [ dUNT] in
②
parameter 3 group. E. Thyristor
⑨ unit
④ Manual control indicator : Turns ON during manual controlling.
⑩ ⑭ ⑤ Remote SV control indicator : Turns ON during remote SV controlling. F. Pressure
transmitter
⑥ Control output (OUT1, OUT2) indicator: Turns ON when the control output
is ON.
G. Temp.
※Using current output, in case that for manual control MV is 0.0%, the transmitter
⑪ ⑫ ⑬ control output indicator turns OFF but the other cases it turns ON always.
In case that for auto control MV is over 3.0%, it turns ON and the MV is H. Accessories
below 2.0%, it turns OFF.
⑦ Auto tuning indicator: Flashes by 1 sec. when executing auto tuning.
⑧ Alarm output (AL1, AL2, AL3) indicator: Turns ON when the alarm output is
ON.
⑨ Multi SV indicator: The SV 1 to 3 indicator turns ON when using multi SV
function.
⑩ Bar graph for control output: Displays control output MV as bar graph.
⑮ KPN5 00 as 1 output type has one bar graph (OUT1), and the KPN5 1
as 2 output type has two bar graphs (OUT1, OUT2).
⑪ key: Used when switching auto control to manual control.
⑫ key: Used when entering parameter setting group, returning to RUN
mode, moving parameter, saving the set value.
⑬ key: Used when entering the set value changing mode and moving or changing up/down digit.
⑭ Digital input key : When pressing the + keys for 3 sec. at the same time, it operates the function (RUN/STOP, alarm clear, KPN
auto-tuning) set at digital input key [ DI-K ] in parameter 5 group.

⑮ PC loader port: It is the PC loader port for serial communication to set and monitor parameters by PC. Use this port for
connection SCM-US (USB to serial convertor).
※ Display part is different by options.
Dimensions
٧٧KPN53 (unit:mm)
6 64.5 ● Panel cut-out
48 Min. 65
1.5 6
<Bracket> Terminal
cover
92 +0.8
0
Min. 115
91.5
96
45 +0.6
0
٧٧KPN55 6 64.5
96 ● Panel cut-out
1.5 6 Min. 115
<Bracket>
Terminal
cover
92 +0.8
0
Min. 115
91.5
92 +0.8
0
D-5
KPN Series
Dimensions
٧٧Terminal cover (sold separately) (unit:mm)
● RHA-COVER ● RLA-COVER
2
(48×96 mm) 47. (96×96 mm) 94
13
91.5
91.5
13
Sold separately
٧٧Communication converter
SCM-WF48 (available soon) SCM-US48 SCM-38 SCM-US
(Wi-Fi to RS485/USB (USB to RS485 converter) (RS232C to RS485 converter) (USB to Serial converter)
communication
converter)
(pending)
٧٧Current transformer(CT)
CSTC-E80LN
F=50Hz
Ø23.3 10
Ta=25℃ Max. load current: 80A(50/60Hz)
Ø7 100Ω ※Max. load current for TPN Series is 50A.
OUTPUT IN VOLTS RMS(V)
3 Current ratio: 1/1000

K(Black) 1 10Ω Wire wounded resistance: 31Ω±10%
3.8
7
L(White)
0.1
26.5 150
0.01
10.5
(unit: mm)
0.001
0.1 1 10 100 1000
SENSED CURRENT IN AMPS RMS(Io)
CSTC-E200LN
Ø37.1 10 100Ω Max. load current: 200A(50/60Hz)
Ta=25℃
※Max. load current for TPN Series is 50A.
Ø13
OUTPUT IN VOLTS RMS(V)
3 10Ω Current ratio: 1/1000

K(Black) 1 Wire wounded resistance: 20Ω±10%
4.5
10
L(White) 0.1
40.8 150
0.01
13.5
(unit: mm) 0.001

0.1 1 10 100 1000
SENSED CURRENT IN AMPS RMS(Io)
※Do not supply primary current in case that CT output is open. High voltage will be generated in CT output.
※The current for above two CTs is 50A same but inner hole sizes are different. Please use this for your environment.
D-6
Input type Dot Parameter Input range (℃) Input range (℉) B. Indicator
1 TcK1 -200 to 1350 -328 to 2463
K(CA)
0.1 TcK2 -199.9 to 999.9 -199.9 to 999.9 C. Converter
1 TcJ1 -200 to 800 -328 to 1472
J(IC)
0.1 TcJ2 -199.9 to 800.0 -199.9 to 999.9 D. Controller
1 TcE1 -200 to 800 -328 to 1472
E(CR)
0.1 TcE2 -199.9 to 800.0 -199.9 to 999.9 E. Thyristor
unit
1 TcT1 -200 to 400 -328 to 752
T(CC)
0.1 TcT2 -199.9 to 400.0 -199.9 to 752.0 F. Pressure
transmitter
B(PR) 1 TC-B 0 to 1800 32 to 3272
Thermocouple
R(PR) 1 TC-R 0 to 1750 32 to 3182 G. Temp.
transmitter
S(PR) 1 TC-S 0 to 1750 32 to 3182
N(NN) 1 TC-N -200 to 1300 -328 to 2372 H. Accessories
C(TT)※1 1 TC-C 0 to 2300 32 to 4172
G(TT)※2 1 TC-G 0 to 2300 32 to 4172
1 TcL1 -200 to 900 -328 to 1652
L(IC)
0.1 TcL2 -199.9 to 900.0 -199.9 to 999.9
1 TcU1 -200 to 400 -328 to 752
U(CC)
0.1 TcU2 -199.9 to 400.0 -199.9 to 752.0
Platinel II 1 TC-P 0 to 1390 32 to 2534
Cu50Ω 0.1 Cu50 -199.9 to 200.0 -199.9 to 392.0
Cu100Ω 0.1 Cu10 -199.9 to 200.0 -199.9 to 392.0
1 JPt1 -200 to 650 -328 to 1202
JPt100Ω
RTD 0.1 JPt2 -199.9 to 650.0 -199.9 to 999.9
DPt50Ω 0.1 DPt5 -199.9 to 650.0 -199.9 to 999.9
KPN
1 DPt1 -200 to 650 -328 to 1202
DPt100Ω
0.1 DPt2 -199.9 to 650.0 -199.9 to 999.9
Nickel120Ω 1 Ni12 -80 to 200 -112 to 392
0-10 V A-V1
0-5 V A-V2
1-5 V A-V3 -1999 to 9999
Analog
0-100 mV aMV1 (display range depends on the decimal point position )
0-20 mA aMA1
4-20 mA aMA2
※ 1: C(TT) : Same as existing W5(TT) type sensor.

※ 2: G(TT) : Sane as existing W(TT) type sensor.
SV settings
You can set the temperature to control with the , , keys.
Set range is within SV low-limit value [ L-SV] to SV high-limit value [ H-SV].
※ Ex) In case of changing set temperature from 210 ℃ to 250 ℃
① ② ③ ④
Press any key among the Press the key to move digit. Press the or key to raise Press the MODE key to save
, , in RUN mode to (100→101→102→103→100) or lower the setting value. the setting value. If there is
enter into SV setting mode. (1 → 5) no additional key operations
Last digit (100 digit) on SV in 3 sec., the changed SV is
display part flashes. automatically saved.
D-7
KPN Series
Parameter groups
RUN mode
Press any key MODE 2 sec.

among the
※1 ※1 MODE ※1
PASS PASS PASS
MODE MODE
When PW is valid.
PARU※2 PAR1 PAR2

MODE MODE MODE
When PW is
valid.
SV SV setting Control output RUN/STOP(R-S) Auto-tuning RUN/STOP(AT)

Automatically MODE 1.5 sec. MODE MODE 1.5 sec. MODE
saves after
5 sec.
User parameter set Multi SV number (SV-N) Heating proportional band (H-P)
in DAQMaster
Heater current monitoring (CT-A) Cooling proportional band (C-P)
Alarm output 1 low-limit (AL!L) Heating integral time (H-I)
Alarm output 1 high-limit (AL!H) Cooling integral time (C-I)
Alarm output 2 low-limit (AL@L) Heating derivative time (H-D)
Alarm output 2 high-limit (AL@H) Cooling derivative time (C-D)
Alarm output 3 low-limit (AL#L) Dead band (DB)
Alarm output 1 high-limit (AL#H) Manual reset (REST)
SV-0 set value (SV-0) Heating hysteresis (hHYS)
SV-1 set value (SV-1) Heating OFF offset (hOST)
SV-2 set value (SV-2) Cooling hysteresis (cHYS)
SV-3 set value (SV-3) Cooling OFF offset (cOST)

MODE
MV low-limit (L-MV)
MV high-limit (H-MV)
RAMP-Up change rate (RAMU)

※1: PASS parameter is displayed only when password is set.
It is not displayed when purchasing the unit because the default RAMP-Down change rate (RAMD)
password is set to 0000.
If the password is not valid, the screen is changed to the password code RAMP unit (rUNT)
screen. MODE
Press any key among the key to return to password entering
window. Press the MODE key to return to RUN mode.
If you forget the password, contact our service center after checking the
password code.
※2: It is displayed when setting user parameter group in the integrated device
management program (DAQMaster).
※ Press the MODE key over 2 sec. in RUN mode to enter.

※ Press the MODE key for 1.5 sec. while in setting mode to move to other
parameter group.
※ Press the MODE key over 3 sec. while in setting mode to return to RUN mode.
※ Press the MODE key at the lowest level of parameter to move parameter group
screen. Press the keys to move other parameter groups.
※ If there is no additional key operation within 30 sec. after entering into setting
mode, it will be automatically returned to RUN mode and previous setting value
will be remained.
※ The shaded parameters( ) are displayed in common. The others may not
be displayed by the specifications of the product, other parameter’s setting, or
parameter mask setting.
MODE 3 sec. MODE 3 sec.
D-8
A. Recorder
B. Indicator
MODE 3 sec.
C. Converter
D. Controller
H-MV C-MV
Heating MV monitoring Cooling MV monitoring
E. Thyristor
unit
PAR3 PAR4 PAR5 F. Pressure

transmitter
MODE MODE MODE
G. Temp.
transmitter
Input type(IN-T) Alarm output 1 operation mode(AL-1) Multi SV (MtSV)
MODE 1.5 sec. MODE MODE 1.5 sec. MODE MODE 1.5 sec. MODE
H. Accessories
Sensor temperature unit (UNIT) Alarm output 1 option (AL!T) Digital input key (DI-K)
Analog low-limit input (L-RG) Alarm output 1 hysteresis (A!HY) DI-1 input terminal function (DI-1)
Analog high-limit input (H-RG) Alarm output 1 N.O./N.C. (A!N) DI-2 input terminal function (DI-2)
Scale value decimal point (DOT) Alarm output 1 ON delay time (A!ON) Remote SV (ReSV)
Low-limit scale value (L-SC) Alarm output 1 OFF delay time (A!OF) Remote SV low-limit correction (RInB)
High-limit scale value (H-SC) Alarm output 2 operation mode (AL-2) Remote SV high-limit gradient
correction (RSPN)
Display unit (dUNT) Alarm output 2 option (AL@T)
Bar graph (BAR)
Input correction (IN-B) Alarm output 2 hysteresis (A@HY)
Manual control, initial MV (ItMV)
Input digital filter (MAvF) Alarm output 2 N.O./N.C. (A@N)
Manual control, preset MV (PrMV) KPN
SV low-limit value (L-SV) Alarm output 2 ON delay time (A@ON)
Sensor error, MV (ErMV)
SV high-limit value (H-SV) Alarm output 2 OFF delay time (A@OF)
Control stop, MV (StMV)
Control output operation mode (O-FT) Alarm output 3 operation mode (AL-2)
Control stop, alarm output (StAL)
Control type (C-MD) Alarm output 3 option (AL#T)
User level (USER)
Auto-tuning mode (ATT) Alarm output 3 hysteresis (A#HY)
SV group lock (LcSV)
OUT1 control output (OUT1) Alarm output 3 N.O./N.C. (A#N)
Parameter group 1 lock (LcP1)
OUT1 current output range (O!MA) Alarm output 3 ON delay time (A#ON)
OUT2 control output (OUT2) Alarm output 3 OFF delay time (A#OF)
OUT2 current output range (O@MA) LBA monitoring time (LBaT)
Heating control time (H-T) LBA detection band (LBaB)
Cooling control time (C-T) Analog trans. output value (AoM1)
MODE
Password (PWD)
PV trans. output low-limit (FsL1)
MODE
PV trans. output high-limit (FsH1)
Comm. address (ADRS)
Comm. speed (BPS)
Comm. parity bit (PRTY)
Comm. stop bit (STP)
Comm. response waiting time (RSwT)
Comm. write (COMW)
MODE
MODE 3 sec. MODE 3 sec. MODE 3 sec.
D-9
KPN Series
Parameter 1 group
※1: S : Press any key among , ,
MODE 3 sec.
RUN mode ※After entering setting mode, press key anytime for 3 sec. to return to Run mode.
MODE
※After entering setting mode, press key anytime for 1.5 sec. to go to the concerned group name.
S ※1 ※If you press the key after changing the setting value of the parameter the setting value will be stored.
PASS ※ Shaded parameters are for standard-level users, the others are for high-level users.
When password is (You can set the user level in parameter 5 group)
invalid, SV display part ※ This parameter might not be displayed depending on other parameter settings.
displays password code
Enter password
MODE S
When PW
PASS 0001
is invalid MODE
When PV is valid
Parameter 1 group Parameter 2 group Parameter 3 group
PAR1 PAR2 PAR3
MODE
Control output
RUN/STOP
S
MODE
R-S RUN STOP
MODE
Multi SV numbers
S
SV-N SV-0 SV-1 SV-2 SV-3
MODE
※ Displays the set SV0 to SV3 at multi SV[ MtSV].
Heater current monitoring
S
• Set range : 00.0 to 50.0 A(display range)
CT-A )0
MODE • Set range: deviation alarm (-F.S. to F.S.),
absolute value alarm (within display range), unit (℃/℉)
※ Displayed only when alarm output 1 operation mode [ AL-1] is set as deviation/
Alarm output 1 low-limit
S absolute value low-limit alarm or deviation high/low-limit reserve alarm.
AL!L 1550 ※ Displayed only when alarm output 1 operation mode [ AL-1] is set as heater
MODE break alarm [ HBA], set heater break SV.
※ Not displayed when alarm output 1 operation mode [ AL-1] is no alarm
output [ OFF], sensor break alarm [SBA], or loop break alarm [ LBA].
Alarm output 1 high-limit
S ※ Displayed only when alarm output 1 operation mode [ AL-1] is set as devia-
AL!H 1550 tion/absolute value high-limit alarm or deviation high/low-limit reserve alarm.
MODE
※ Not displayed when alarm output 1 operation mode [ AL-1] is no alarm
output [ OFF], sensor break alarm [ SBA], loop break alarm [ LBA], or heater
Alarm output 2 low-limit break alarm [ HBA].
S
AL@L 1550
MODE

S
AL@H 1550
MODE
※ Except heater break alarm, it is same as alarm output 1 for display
Alarm output 3 low-limit or not display the parameters.
S
AL#L 1550
MODE

S
AL#H 1550
MODE
SV-0 set value

S
SV-0 0000
MODE
SV-1 set value

S
SV-1 0000
MODE
• Set range : within L-S V to H-S V, unit (℃/℉)
SV-2 set value ※ Displays the set S V 0 to S V3 at multi SV [ MtS V ].
S
SV-2 0000
MODE
SV-3 set value

S
SV-3 0000
D-10
Parameter 2 group A. Recorder

※After entering setting mode, press key anytime for 3 sec. to return to Run mode. B. Indicator
※If you press the key after changing the setting value of the parameter the setting value will be stored.
C. Converter
※ Shaded parameters are for standard-level users, the others are for high-level users.
(You can set the user level in parameter 5 group)
※ This parameter might not be displayed depending on other parameter settings. D. Controller
Parameter 2 group Parameter 3 group Parameter 4 group E. Thyristor

unit
PAR2 PAR3 PAR4
MODE F. Pressure
transmitter
Auto-tuning RUN/STOP ※1
S
MODE
AT OFF ON G. Temp.
transmitter
MODE
Heating, • Set range : 000.1 to 999.9℃ / ℉, %

proportional band H. Accessories
S ※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
H-P 01)0 is heating [ HEAT] or heating&cooling [ H-C] control.
MODE
Cooling,
proportional band
S • Set range : 000.1 to 999.9℃ / ℉, %
C-P 01)0 ※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
MODE
is cooling [ COOL] or heating&cooling [ H-C] control.
Heating, integral time
S • Set range : 0001 to 9999 sec.
H-1 0000 ※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
MODE is heating [ HEAT] or heating&cooling [ H-C] control.
※ Displayed only when
Cooling, integral time control type [ C-MD] is
C-1 0000 ※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
PID control.
MODE
is cooling [ COOL] or heating&cooling [ H-C] control. KPN
Heating, derivative time

H-D 0000 ※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
MODE
is heating [ HEAT] or heating&cooling [ H-C] control.
Cooling, derivative time
C-D 0000 ※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
MODE
Dead band
S • Set range :
DB 0000 ►P/P, P/ONOFF, ONOFF/P control: -significant proportion to 0.0 to + significant proportion
MODE
►ONOFF/ONOFF control:-999 to 0999 digit (temperature H),
-199.9 to 999.9digit (temperature L), -99.9 to 099.9% F.S. (analog) sec.
※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT] is heating&cooling [ H-C] control.
Manual reset • Set range : 000.0 to 100.0%

S
REST 05)0 ※ Displays proportional control [ H-P or C-P= )0].
MODE ※ Not displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT ] is
heating&cooling [ H-C] control.
Heating, hysteresis
S
• Set range : 001 to 100digit (000.1 to 100.0)
hHYS 002
※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
MODE
is heating [ HEAT] or heating&cooling [ H-C] control.
Heating, OFF offset
S • Set range : 000 to 100digit (000.0 to 100.0)
hOST 000 ※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
MODE
is heating [ HEAT] or heating&cooling [ H-C] control. ※ Displays only when
Cooling, hysteresis control type [C-MD] is
S • Set range : 001 to 100digit (000.1 to 100.0) ONOF or OnON.
cHYS 002 ※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
MODE
Cooling, OFF offset
S
cOST 000
MODE
※ Displayed only when control output operation mode [ O-FT]
is cooling [ COOL] is heating&cooling [ H-C] control.
D-11
KPN Series
MV low-limit
S • Set range :
L-MV 00)0 ► Standard control : 000.0 to (H-MV-0.1%)
MODE
► Heating/Cooling control : -100.0 to 000.0%
MV high-limit
S • Set range :
H-MV 10)0 ► Standard control : (L-MV+0.1) to 100.0%
MODE
► Heating/Cooling control : 000.0 to 100.0%
※ Displays only when control
RAMP-Up change rate type [C-MD] is ONOF or OnON.
S
LAMU 0000 • Set range : 000 to 999digit (000.0 to 999.9)
MODE
RAMP-Down change rate

S
LAMD 0000 • Set range : 000 to 999digit (000.0 to 999.9)
MODE
RAMP unit
S
rUNT MIN HOUR SEC • Set range : SEC / MIN / HOUR
Parameter 3 group

※After entering setting mode, press key anytime for 3 sec. to return to Run mode.

PAR3 PAR4 PAR5
MODE
Input type ※1
S
MODE
IN-T KCaH KCaL •••••• NI12
MODE
Temperature unit
S ※ Displayed only when input type [ IN-T] is
UNIT '?C ?F temperature sensor input.
MODE
Analog low-limit input

S
L-RG 0)00 • Set range : Min. range to (H-RG-F.S.10% digit)
MODE
Analog high-limit input

S
H-RG 1)00 • Set range : (L-RG + F.S.10% digit) to Max. range
MODE
Decimal point
S
DOT )0 • Set range : 0 / 0.0 / 0.00 / 0.000
MODE
※ Displayed only when
Low-limit scale value input type [ IN-T] is
S
analog input.
L-SC 00)0 • Set range : -1999 to 9999
MODE
High-limit scale value

S
H-SC 10)0 • Set range : -1999 to 9999
MODE
Display unit
S
dUNT ?/O OFF ?C ?F
D-12
Input correction
S A. Recorder
IN-B 000 • Set range : -999 to 0999digit [-199.9 to 999.9]
MODE
B. Indicator
Input digital filter
S
MAvF 00)1 • Set range : 000.1 to 120.0 sec. C. Converter
MODE
D. Controller
SV low-limit
S
L-SV -200 • Set range : input low-limit [ L-SC] to H-SV-1digit ℃ / ℉ / %
E. Thyristor
MODE unit
F. Pressure
SV high-limit transmitter
S
H-SV 1350 • Set range : L-SC+1digit to input high-limit [ H-SV] ℃ / ℉ / %
MODE G. Temp.
transmitter
Control output
operation mode HEAT COOL ※ 1 output model
S H. Accessories
O-FT
MODE
H-C HEAT COOL ※ 2 output model
Control type PID ONOF ※ 1 output model

S
C-MD
MODE pP pON OnP OnON ※ 2 output model
Auto-tuning mode
S
AtT TUN1 TUN2 ※ Displayed only when control type [ C-MD] is PID control.
MODE
OUT1 control output

S
RLY SSR CURR ※ 1 output model KPN
OUT1
MODE SSR CURR ※ 2output model ※ Not displayed for the 2 output type and fixed
relay model for OUT1 (KPN5 17, KPN5 19).
OUT1 current
output range
S
O!MA 4-20 0-20 ※ Displays only when OUT1 is current output [ CURR].
MODE
OUT2 control output

S ※ Not displayed for the 2 output type and fixed relay model for
OUT2 SSR CURR OUT2 (KPN5 13, KPN5 19).
MODE
OUT2 current
output range
S
O@MA 4-20 0-20 ※ Displays only when OUT2 is current output [ CURR].
MODE
Heating control time

S
H-T 02)0
MODE
• Set range : 000.1 to 120.0 sec.
Cooling control time ※ Displayed only when control type [ C-MD] is PID control.
S
※ Not displayed for current output.
C-T 02)0
D-13
KPN Series
Parameter 4 group

PAR4 PAR5 PAR1
MODE
Alarm output 1
operation mode ※1
S
MODE
AL-1 DVCC ]]DV •••••• OFF
MODE
Alarm output 1 option

S
AL!T AL-A AL-B •••••• AL-F
MODE
※ Displayed except when alarm output 1 operation mode (AL-1) is OFF.
Alarm output 1 hysteresis

S
A!HY 001
※Displayed only when alarm output 1 operation mode [ AL-1] is set as deviation/absolute
MODE
value high-limit, low-limit, high/low limit alarm or reserve alarm.
Alarm 1 N.O./N.C.
S
A!N NO NC
MODE
Alarm 1 ON delay time

S
A!ON 0000 • Set range : 0000 to 3600 sec. ※ Displayed except when alarm output 1 operation
MODE
mode [ AL-1] is OFF.
Alarm 1 OFF delay time

S
A!OF 0000 • Set range : 0000 to 3600 sec.
MODE
Alarm output 2
operation mode
S
AL-2 ]]DV ]DV[ •••••• DVCC
MODE

S
AL@T AL-A AL-B •••••• AL-F
MODE
※ Displayed except when alarm output 2 operation mode (AL-2) is OFF.

S
A@HY 001
※Displayed only when alarm output 2 operation mode [ AL-2] is set as deviation/absolute
MODE
value high-limit, low-limit, high/low limit alarm or reserve alarm.
Alarm 2 N.O./N.C.
S
A@N NO NC
MODE
Alarm 2 ON delay time ※ Displayed except when alarm output 2 operation

S
A@ON 0000 • Set range : 0000 to 3600 sec. mode [ AL-2] is OFF.
MODE

S
A@OF 0000 • Set range : 0000 to 3600 sec.
MODE
D-14
Alarm output 3
operation mode
S A. Recorder
AL-3 ]]DV ]DV[ •••••• DVCC
MODE
B. Indicator
S
AL#T AL-A AL-B •••••• AL-F C. Converter
MODE
※ Displayed except when alarm output 3 operation mode[ AL-3] is OFF.
S D. Controller
A#HY 001
MODE
※Displayed except when alarm output 3 operation mode [ AL-2] is set as deviation/
absolute value high-limit, low-limit, high/low limit alarm or reserve alarm. E. Thyristor
unit
Alarm 3 N.O./N.C.
S
A#N NO NC F. Pressure
transmitter
MODE
Alarm 3 ON delay time G. Temp.

S ※ Displayed except when alarm output 3 operation transmitter
A#ON 0000 • Set range : 0000 to 3600 sec. mode [ AL-3] is OFF.
MODE
H. Accessories
S
A#OF 0000 • Set range : 0000 to 3600 sec.
MODE
LBA monitoring time

S
LBaT 0000 • Set range : 0000 to 9999 sec.
MODE ※ Displayed only when alarm output
1/2/3 operation mode [ AL-1/2/3]
LBA detection band is loop break alarm [ LBA].
S
LBaB 003 • Set range : 000 to 999 (H), 000.0 to 999.9 (L),
MODE 000.0 to 99.99 (analog)℃/℉/%
Analog trans. output

S
AO-M PV SV H-MV C-MV
MODE
KPN
PV trans. output ※ Displayed only
low-limit
S for transmission
FS-L -200 • Set range : F.S. output model
MODE (KPN5
PV trans. output 30).
high-limit value
S
FS-H 1350 • Set range : F.S.
MODE
Com. address
S
ADRS 01 • Set range : 01 to 127
MODE
Com. speed
S
BPS 96 192 •••••• 48
MODE
Com. parity bit

S
PRTY NONE EVEN ODD
MODE
Com. stop bit

S
STP 2 1
MODE
Com. response
waitting time
S
RSwT 20
MODE
Com. write
S
COMW EnA DIsA
MODE
D-15
KPN Series
Parameter 5 group

PAR5 PAR1 PAR2
MODE
Multi SV ※1
S
MODE
MtSV 1 2 4
MODE
Digital input key

S
DI-K STOP AlRE
MODE
DI-1 input
terminal function
S
DI-1 STOP AlRE •••••• OFF
MODE
DI-2 input
terminal function
S
DI-2 AlRE MAN •••••• STOP
MODE
Remote SV
S
ㄲRESV OFF ON
MODE
Remote SV
low-limit correction
S ※ Displayed only for remote SV model (KPN5 30).
ㄲR1NB 0
MODE
Remote SV high-limit
gradient correction
S
RSPN !00
MODE
Bar graph
S
BAR OUT1 OUT2 ALL
MODE
Manual control,
initial MV
S
ItMV AUTO PrMV
MODE
Manual control,
preset MV
S
PrMV 00)0
MODE
Sensor error, MV
S
ErMV 00)0 • Set range :
MODE ► Standard control : 000.0 to 100.0%
► Heating / Cooling control : -100.0 to 100.0%
Control stop, MV
S
StMV 00)0
MODE
D-16
A. Recorder
Control stop,
alarm output
S
StAL CONT OFF B. Indicator
MODE
C. Converter
User level
S
USER STND HIGH
D. Controller
MODE
SV setting lock E. Thyristor

S unit
LcSV OFF ON
MODE F. Pressure
transmitter
Parameter 1 group lock G. Temp.

S
LcP1 OFF ON transmitter
MODE
H. Accessories
Parameter 2 group lock

S
LcP2 OFF ON
MODE

S
LcP3 OFF ON
MODE

S
LcP4 OFF ON
MODE

S KPN
LcP5 OFF ON
MODE
Password setting
S
PWD 0000 • Set range : 0000 (password function Off), 0002 to 9999
D-17
KPN Series
Factory default
SV setting [ SV ] Password input parameter

Parameter Default Parameter Default
SVㅓㅓㅓ 0 PASSㅓㅓㅓ 0001
Parameter 1 group [ PAR1 ]

R-Sㅓㅓㅓ RUN AL!L 1550 AL#L 0000 SV-2 0000
SV-N SV-0 AL!H 1550 AL#H 0000 SV-3 0000
CT-A )0 AL@L 1550 SV-0 0000
AL!L 1550 AL@H 1550 SV-1 0000

AT OFF H-D 0000 hOST 000 RAMU 000
H-P 01)0 C-D 0000 cHYS 002 RAMD 000
C-P 01)0 DB 0000 cOST 000 rUNT MIN
H-1 0000 REST 05)0 L-MV `0)0
C-1 0000 hHYS 002 H-MV 10)0

IN-T KCaH H-SC 10)0 HEAT SSR
O-FT
UNIT '?C dUNT ?/O H-C O!MA 4-20
L-RG 0)00 IN-B 0000 PID OUT2 SSR
C-MD
H-RG 1)00 MAvF 00)1 pP O@MA 4-20
DOT )0 L-SV -200 AtT TUN1 H-T 02)0(Relay)
L-SC 00)0 H-SV 1350 OUT1 RLY C-T 00)0(SSR drive)

Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default
AL-1 DVCC AL-2 ]]DV AL-3 LBA LBaT 0000 BPS 96
AL!T AL-A AL@T AL-A AL#T AL-A LBaB 002 PRTY NONE
A!HY 001 A@HY 001 A#HY 001 AoM PV STP 2
A!N NO A@N NO A#N NO FsL -200 RSWT 20
A!ON 0000 A@ON 0000 A#ON 0000 FsH 1350 COMW EnA
A!OF 0000 A@OF 0000 A#OF 0000 ADRS 01

MtSV 1 RSPN !000 StMV 00)0 LcP3 OFF
DI-K STOP OUT1 StAL CONT LcP4 OFF
BAR
DI-1 OFF ALL USER STND LcP5 OFF
DI-2 OFF ItMV AUTO LcSV OFF PWD 0000
ReSV OFF PrMV 00)0 LcP1 OFF
R1nB 0000 ErMV 00)0 LcP2 OFF
※ Shaded parameters are factory defaults for the heating & cooling model.
D-18
Alarm operation B. Indicator
Mode Name Operation Description
OFF - - No alarm output C. Converter
If deviation between PV and SV as high- D. Controller

Deviation high-limit limit is higher than set value of deviation
DVCC SV PV PV SV
alarm temperature, the alarm output will be
100℃ 110℃ 90℃ 100℃ E. Thyristor
ON. unit
High deviation : Set as 10℃ High deviation : Set as -10℃
F. Pressure
If deviation between PV and SV as low- transmitter
Deviation low-limit limit is higher than set value of deviation
]]DV PV SV SV PV
alarm temperature, the alarm output will be
90℃ 100℃ 100℃ 110℃ G. Temp.
ON. transmitter
Low deviation : Set as 10℃ Low deviation : Set as -10℃
If deviation between PV and SV as H. Accessories

Deviation high/low- high/low-limit is higher than set value of
]DV[ PV SV PV
limit alarm deviation temperature, the alarm output
90℃ 100℃ 120℃
will be ON.
Low deviation : Set as 10℃ , High deviation : Set as 20℃
If deviation between PV and SV as

Deviation high/low- high/low-limit is higher than set value of
CDV]
limit reserve alarm PV SV PV deviation temperature, the alarm output
90℃ 100℃ 120℃ will be OFF.
Low deviation : Set as 10℃ , High deviation : Set as 20℃
Absolute value high If PV is higher than the absolute value,

PVCC PV SV SV PV
limit alarm the output will be ON.
90℃ 100℃ 100℃ 110℃
Absolute value alarm : Set as 90℃ Absolute value alarm : Set as 110℃
KPN
Absolute value low If PV is lower than the absolute value,

]]PV SV PV
limit alarm PV SV the output will be ON.
90℃ 100℃ 100℃ 110℃
Absolute value alarm : Set as 90℃ Absolute value alarm : Set as 110℃
LBA Loop break alarm - It will be ON when it detects loop break.
It will be ON when it detects sensor
SBA Sensor break alarm -
disconnection.
It will be ON when CT detects heater
HBA Heater break alarm -
break.
※ H : alarm output hysteresis [ A .HY]
Alarm option
Mode Name Description
AL-A Standard alarm If it is an alarm condition, alarm output is ON. If it is a clear alarm condition, alarm output is OFF.
AL-B Alarm latch If it is an alarm condition, alarm output is ON and maintains ON status.
First alarm condition is ignored and from second alarm condition, standard alarm operates. When
AL-C Standby sequence 1 power is supplied and it is an alarm condition, this first alarm condition is ignored and from the
second alarm condition, standard alarm operates.
If it is an alarm condition, it operates both alarm latch and standby sequence. When power is
Alarm latch and
AL-D supplied and it is an alarm condition, this first alarm condition is ignored and from the second alarm
standby sequence 1
condition, alarm latch operates.
First alarm condition is ignored and from second alarm condition, standard alarm operates. When
AL-E Standby sequence 2 re-applied standby sequence and if it is alarm condition, alarm output does not turn ON. After
clearing alarm condition, standard alarm operates.
Basic operation is same as alarm latch and standby sequence 1. If it operates not only by power
Alarm latch and standby ON/OFF, but also alarm setting value, or alarm option changing. When re-applied standby
AL-F
sequence 2 sequence and if it is alarm condition, alarm output does not turn ON.
After clearing alarm condition, alarm latch operates.
※ Condition of re-applied standby sequence for standby sequence 1, alarm latch and standby sequence 1: Power ON
Condition of re-applied standby sequence for standby sequence 2, alarm latch and standby sequence 2: Power ON, changing set temperature,
alarm temperature[ AL1, AL2] or alarm operation [ AL-1, AL-2] ), switching STOP mode to RUN mode.
D-19
KPN Series
Control output mode [ O-FT] Auto-tuning [ AT]

• Control output modes for general temperature control In PID control, auto-tuning processes the control subject's
include heating, cooling, and heating/cooling. thermal characteristics and thermal response rate,
• Heating control (reverse operation) and cooling control and then determines the necessary PID time constant.
(normal operation) are mutually opposing operations Application of the PID time constant realizes fast response
with inverse outputs. and high precision temperature control.
• The PID time constant varies based on the controlled • Auto-tuning automatically stores PID time constants
objects during PID control. upon termination. These PID time constants can then
be modified by the user to suit their usage environment.
Control output
(MV) • When auto-tuning is in progress, the AT lamp located
100% on the front of the controller flashes in 1 second
intervals. When auto-tuning finishes, the AT lamp
automatically goes off and the auto-tuning parameter
Heating will return to OFF.
0% PV
Heating (reverse) SV Description
Control output OFF Auto-tuning stops
(MV)
100% ON Auto-tuning starts
Group Parameter Set range Default Unit

Cooling PAR2 AT OFF/ ON OFF ㅡ
※ Manual interruption or a sensor break error when auto-

0% PV
Cooling (normal) tuning is in progress restores the PID time constant to
the value used prior to the auto-tuning session.
Group Parameter Set range Default Unit ※ Auto-tuning continues to run even if the temperature
Standard model reading exceeds or falls below the input range.
HEAT/ COOL HEAT ㅡ
※ When auto-turning is in progress, parameters can only
PAR3 O-FT Heating & Cooling be referenced and not altered.
mode H-C ㅡ ※ Auto-tuning is not available in manual control. (Manual
HEAT/ COOL/ H-C Control).
Heating control [ HEAT]

Control output(OUT1/OUT2) selection
The output will be provided in order to supply power to the
[ OUT1 / OUT2 ]
load (heater) if PV(present temperature) falls below SV(set
temperature). • The 1 output type (OUT1) model supports relay, current,
SSR drive voltage output.
• The 2 output type (OUT1, OUT2) model supports relay
Cooling control [ COOL] fixed or current, SSR drive voltage output.
The output will be provided in order to supply power to
the load (cooler) if PV(present temperature) rises above
SV(set temperature) Parameter mask
This function is able to hide unnecessary parameters to
Heating/Cooling control [ H-C] user environment or less frequently used parameters in
parameter setting group. You can set this in the integrated
Heating and Cooling with a single temperature controller device management program (DAQMaster).
when it is difficult to control subject temperature with only
Though masked parameters are not displayed in parameter
heating or cooling.
setting group, the parameter setting values are applied. For
Heating and cooling control mode controls the object using more information, refer to the DAQMaster user manual.
different PID time constants for each heating and cooling. Visit our website (www.autonics.com) to download the
It is also possible to set heating and cooling control in both DAQMaster program and the user manual.
PID control or ON/OFF control mode. Heating/cooling
output can be selected among Relay output, SSR output <Before applying mask>
and current output depending on model types chosen PAR2 AT H-P C-P
according to your application environment. (Note that
only standard SSR control is available for SSR output in
OUT2.) H-1 C-1 H-D C-D
Cooling control output
Cooling load <After applying mask>
Temperature
drop Temperature Cooling PAR2 H-P H-1 H-D
Temperature control
sensor input controller
Heating
The above is masking auto tuning [ A T], cooling
(Feedback) (Controller)
Temperature control proportional band [ C-P], cooling integral time [ C-I],
rise cooling derivative time [ C-D] parameters in parameter 2
Heating load group.
Heating control output
※ For heating and cooling control, OUT1 control output is
dedicated to heating control and OUT2 control output to
cooling control.
D-20
User parameter group [ PARU]

Proper usage A. Recorder
This function is able to set the frequently used parameters
to the user parameter group.
Simple troubleshooting for process controller
You can quickly and easily set par Visit our website (www. B. Indicator
autonics.com) to download the DAQMaster program and ● When the load (Heater etc) is not operated
the user manual. Please check operation of the out indicator located in C. Converter
front panel of the unit. If the indicator does not operate,
RUN mode please check the parameter of all programmed mode.
If the indicator is operating, please check the output D. Controller
(Relay, SSR drive voltage, DC4-20 mA current) after
PARU AT ••• PARS
separating output line from the unit. E. Thyristor
unit
● When it displays OPEN during operation
AL!L AL!H SV-0 hHYS
This is a warning that external sensor is cut off (open). F. Pressure
transmitter
cHYS IN-B A!HY A@HY Please turn off power and check the state of sensor.
If sensor is not cut off (open), disconnect sensor line
G. Temp.
The above is setting user parameter group in the from terminal block and +, - together. When you turn transmitter
DAQMaster with alarm output 1 low-limit value [ AL!！L], on power it can check room temperature.
alarm output 1 high-limit value [ AL!H], SV-0 set value If this unit cannot indicate room temperature, this unit H. Accessories
[ SV-0] parameters of parameter 1 group, heating itself is faulty. Please remove this unit from equipment
hysteresis [ hHYS], cooling hysteresis [ cHYS] parameters and service or replace.
of parameter 2 group, (When the input mode is thermocouple, it is available to
input correction [ IN-B], parameter of parameter 3 group, indicate room temperature.)
alarm output 1 hysteresis [ A!HY], alarm output 2
hysteresis [ A@HY] parameters of parameter 4 group. ● In case of indicating "Error" in display
This Error message is indicated in case of damaging
inner chip program data by outer strong noise.
Bar graph In this case, please send the unit to our after service
MV of control output (OUT1, OUT2) is displayed as the bar center after removing the unit from system.
graph in real-time. According to bar graph setting [ BA R] in Noise protection is designed in this unit, but it does not
parameter 5 group, it displays bar graph by control output stand up strong noise continuously.
or does not display it. If bigger noise than specified(Max. 2 kV) flows in the
unit, it can be damaged.
OUT1 (red LED)
50 100 KPN
OUT2 (green LED)
Caution for using
One LED is 10% (total 10 LEDs: 100%). If control output • The connection of this unit should be separated from
MV is 0.1 to 10%, one LED turns ON. If MV is 90.1 to the power line and high voltage line in order to prevent
100%, 10 LEDs turn ON. inductive noise.
The 1 output type (heating or cooling control) model has • Install a power switch or a circuit breaker to supply or
one OUT1 bar graph (red). cut off the power.
The 2 output type (heating & cooling control) model has • Switch or circuit breaker should be installed nearby
two bar graphs; OUT1 bar graph (red), OUT2 bar graph users for convenient control.
(green). OUT1 is for heating MV and OUT2 is for cooling
MV. • This unit is designed for temperature controlling only.
Do not apply this unit as a voltage meter or a current
meter.
Remote SV setting • In case of using RTD sensor, 3-wire type must be
This function is to set SV by inputting analog (DC4-20 used. If you need to extend the line, use 3-wire with the
mA, 1-5 VDC) signal to no. 13 and 14 terminals. (Set that same thickness as the line. It might cause temperature
remote SV [ ReSV] is ON in parameter 5 group) difference if the resistance of line is different.
Input analog signal is changed to between SV low-limit • In case of making power line and input signal line
value [ L-SV] to SV high-limit value [ H-SV]. closely, line filter for noise protection should be installed
at power line and input signal line should be shielded.
※ When using remote SV, you cannot select SV setting by
front keys and multi SV setting by digital input. • Do not use this unit near the high frequency instruments
• Installation environment
Parameter initialization
① It shall be used indoors.
It initializes all parameters to factory default values. Press ② Altitude max. 2,000 m
the front 1+4+3 keys for 5 sec. at the same time and ③ Pollution degree 2
[ INIT] parameter is displayed. Select ‘YES’ to initialize all ④ Installation category II
parameters.
If the password is set, you must enter the password. After followed.
initialing the parameters, the password parameter is also
initialized.
※ Refer to the KPN user manual for more functions.
D-21
DPU Series
Features
•• Fast response speed and high accuracy •

by high-speed CPU
•• Accurate feedback control (static current, static
voltage, static power) by RMS measurement
•• Phase control and zero-crossing cycle control•
(fixed/variable cycle) method for various load control
•• Protects inner circuit by built-in rapid fuse
•• Remote monitoring and remote control
Supports Modbus RTU protocol by RS485
communication
•• Built-in customizable 6 digital inputs
•• Basic variable alarm outputs; current error, heater
part (parts of heater break detection), etc.
•• Supports multi input of control input signal•
(current, voltage, potentionmeter, etc)
•• Enables to install control part separately Please read “Caution for your safety” in operation manual
•• Applicable load : all loads such as super kanthal,
platinum, molybdenum, carbon, halogen lamp,
chrome, nickel, etc.
DPU 1 2 A 025 R
R RS485 communication
Option D Remote Display Unit
A Remote Display Unit + RS485 communication
N No option
025 25 A 200 200 A

040 40 A 250 250 A
050 50 A 350 350 A
070 70 A 400 400 A
Rated current capacity 080 80 A 500 500 A
100 100 A 600 600 A
120 120 A 750 750 A ※1
150 150 A 950 950 A ※1
180 180 A
1-phase 3-phase
A 0 to 70 A 0 to 50 A
Size B 80 to 200 A 70 to 200 A
C 250 to 350 A
D 400 to 600 A
E Option
1 110 V
Power supply 2 220 V
3 380 V
4 440 V
Number of phases 1 1-phase

3 3-phase
Item
DPU Digital Power Controller Unit
※ 1: For 1-phase models, these are customizable.
E-2
Digital Thyristor Unit
Size type
A. Recorder
٧٧1-phase ٧٧3-phase
(unit: mm) (unit: AWG) (unit: mm) (unit: AWG)
Current • Allowable cable Current• Allowable cable B. Indicator
Size W H D P1 P2 Size W H D P1 P2
capacity thickness capacity thickness
A 0 to 70 A 97 260 170 82 150 Max. 4 A 0 to 50A 140 306 200 127 150 Max. 4 C. Converter
B 80 to 200 A 140 280 174 127 150 Max. 4/0 B 70 to 200A 213 365 217 195 200 Max. 4/0
C 250 to 350 A 213 338 179 193 200 Max. 300MCM C 250 to 350A 278 450 227.5 261 200 Max. 300MCM D. Controller
D 400 to 600 A 278 418 212 261 200 Max. 500MCM D 400 to 600A 427 528 275.5 405 330 Max. 500MCM
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
Specifications transmitter
Series DPU G. Temp.

transmitter
Number of phases 1-phase 3-phase
Power supply 110 VAC / 220 VAC / 380 VAC / 440 VAC (FAN and control power 220 VAC 50/60 Hz separately) H. Accessories
Allowable voltage 90 to 110% of rated voltage 85 to 115% of rated voltage
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (auto recognition), allowable frequency range:±2 Hz
Min. load current 1A
Output range Phase control : 5 to 98%, Z.C. control : 0 to 100%
• Phase control : Normal control(Non-Feedback), static voltage/static current/static power control(Feedback)
Control method※1 • Cycle control(Z.C.) : Fixed cycle control, Variable cycle control
• ON/OFF control(Z.C.)
• Phase control : resistance load, inductive load
Load
• ON/OFF, Cycle control : resistance load
Power consumption Max. 7 W (except FAN operation power) Max. 10 W (except FAN operation power)
• Display value and SV display : 7Segment 4digit • Display value and SV display : 7Segment 4digit
Display method • Status display : 4LED • Status display : 6LED
• Display value percentage display : 11LED Bar • Display value percentage display : 11LED Bar
DPU
• Static voltage feedback control : Within ±3% F.S. of rated voltage(within variable ±10% F.S. of rated voltage)
• Static current feedback control : Within ±3% F.S. of rated voltage(within variable 1 to 10 times of rated resistance)
Output accuracy • Static power feedback control : Within ±3% F.S. of rated voltage(within variable ±10% F.S. of rated voltage and within
variable 1 to 10 times of rated resistance)
• Normal control : within ±10% F.S. of rated voltage
Set method By front keys, By communication
• Auto: 4-20 mA / 0-20 mA / 0-5 VDC / 1-5 VDC / 0-10 VDC /
Control input voltage pulse(0/12 VDC) / no-voltage input(ON/OFF) / communication input(RS485)
• Manual: inside 10 kΩ VR, outside 3 to 10 kΩ VR (min. 2 W)
Digital input(DI) AUTO/MAN switching, RUN/STOP switching, RESET, Output holding, SP setting (SP1 to 6)
Display content Control input, load voltage, load current, load power, load resistance, power supply frequency
Min. display output Min. 2.5% of rated voltage/current
Option output RS485 communication output(Modbus RTU method), [ max. 32 units]
Dielectric strength 2000 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min.(between input terminal and power terminal)
Insulation resistance Min. 200 MΩ(at 500VDC megger)
Ambient
10 to 50 ℃, storage : 20 to 80 ℃
Environ- temperature
ment Ambient
5 to 90%RH
humidity
Approval
• A Size : 3.0 kg • C Size : 11.0 kg • A Size : 6.5 kg • C Size : 20.0 kg
Unit weight
• B Size : 5.5 kg • D Size : 17.5 kg • B Size : 11.5 kg • D Size : 35.5 kg
※ 1. Variable cycle control is only for 1-phase model.

E-3
DPU Series
Connections
1-phase
● A Size ● B Size ● C Size ● D Size
Inside VR(10kΩ)
3-level slide
switch
R S U F.G.
R S U F.G.
R U S F.G.
R S U F.G.
input
•• Do not mix noise to input cable. •
It is recommended to use shield cable, •
twisted cable as input cable for effective noise.
Voltage
•• If there is possible to affect inductive noise, •
Voltage input
it is recommended to use shielded cable at
high-frequency power for effective noise.
Outside
VR
•• DI input switch should be for low current and ON
resistance should be max. 20 Ω (including cable
resistance).
•• DI input terminals are COM, DI-1 to 3, RUN,
AUTO.
•• For remote display unit option model, •
use connection cable as our standard cable.
•• When connecting ⑥, ⑪ , it operates as
MANUAL. When connecting, ⑥, ⑦, ⑪,
it operates AUTO.
AC power IN Load
E-4
3-phase
A. Recorder
● A Size ● B Size ● C Size ● D Size
B. Indicator
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
(R) (S) (T) F.G. (R) (S) (T) F.G. (R) (S) (T) F.G. (R) (S) (T) F.G.
C. Converter
Inside VR(10kΩ) D. Controller

3-level slide
switch
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
H. Accessories
U V W
U V W
U V W
U V W
input
•• Do not mix noise to input cable. •
It is recommended to use shield cable, twisted DPU
cable as input cable for effective noise.
Voltage
Voltage input
•• If there is possible to affect inductive noise, •
it is recommended to use shielded cable at
high-frequency power for effective noise.
Outside
VR
•• DI input switch should be for low current and ON
resistance should be max. 20Ω•
(including cable resistance).
•• DI input terminals are COM, DI-1 to 3, RUN,
AUTO.
•• For remote display unit option model, •
use connection cable as our standard cable.
•• When connecting ⑥, ⑪ , it operates as
MANUAL. When connecting, ⑥, ⑦, ⑪, it
operates AUTO.
Load
Load
Load
E-5
DPU Series
Dimensions
(unit:mm)
1-phase
● A Size : DPU1 A-25 / 40 / 50 / 70
※ 25A, 40A, 50A are not attached a fan.
60
154
30
80
40
135°
260
150(P2)
209.5
170
147
Fixed 4-M5
110
3
82(P1)
97
● B Size : DPU1 B - 80 / 100 / 120 / 150 / 180 / 200
120
222
30
120
50
135°
280
150(P2)
241.5
174
151
Fixed 4-M5
121.5
3
127(P1)
140
E-6
● C Size : DPU1 C - 250 / 350

A. Recorder
38
365 B. Indicator
50
C. Converter
160°
D. Controller
338
200(P2)
300
E. Thyristor
unit
163
Fixed 4-M6 F. Pressure
132
transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
4
193(P1) 179 213 H. Accessories
213
● D Size : DPU1 D - 400 / 500 / 600

38
494
40
160°
200(P2)
280
345
418
DPU
Fixed 4-M6
195
156
4
261(P1) 90 250
278 212 278
٧٧In case of remote display unit + RS485 communication option,
● Panel cut-out
102
102
100.5 +0.5
0
55 55
53.5 +0.5
0
※ It is recommended for remote panel cable to use max. 5 m to prevent noise. (Check the length when ordering it.)
E-7
DPU Series
3-phase
● A Size : DPU3 A - 25 / 40 / 50
235.6
160°
150(P2)
306
239
Fixed 4-M5
200
138
63.5
26
127(P1) 182
140
● B Size : DPU3 B - 70 / 80 / 100 / 120 / 150 / 180 / 200
364
40
160°
200(P2)
280
365
278
Fixed 4-M6
217
176
43.1
195(P1) 199 183
213
٧٧In case of remote display unit + RS485 communication option,
● Panel cut-out
102
100.5 +0.5
0
55
※ It is recommended for remote panel

53.5 +0.5
0
cable to use max. 5 m to prevent noise.
(Check the length when ordering it.)
E-8
● C Size : DPU3 C - 250 / 350

A. Recorder
92.5
125.5
B. Indicator
40
C. Converter
40
D. Controller
200(P2)
489
450
280
E. Thyristor
370
unit
Fixed 4-M6
160° F. Pressure
transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
227.5
311
H. Accessories
173.5
261(P1) 140.5
278
● D Size : DPU3 D - 400 / 500 / 600
167
32.5
DPU
330(P2)
463
528
453
Fixed 4-M8
66.5
204.5
405(P1) 167
427
746
160°
404.5
275.5
204.5
E-9
DPU Series
Part descriptions
① ② ③ ④ ①② ③ ① RUN lamp: Turns ON in RUN, turns OFF in STOP

② AUTO lamp: Turns ON in AUTO, turns OFF in MANUAL
③ EVT lamp
: Turns ON in Digital Input (DI-1 to 3) ON, flashes in alarm output
⑤
④ R, S, T lamp
⑥ ⑥ : Turns ON differently by displayed value in display part•
Ex) When R, S turn ON, it displays voltage between R-S line
⑦ ⑦ ⑤ Display part
: Displays selected display value content in RUN mode, displays
⑧ parameter and set value in SET mode
⑥ V, A lamp
: V lamp turns ON when displaying voltage, •
⑩ ⑩
A lamp turns ON when displaying current, •
⑨ V, A lamps turn ON when displaying power, •
V, A lamps turn OFF when displays resistance and input •
value
⑦ Bar display
: Turns ON as 0 to 100% ratio for selected display value
⑧ key
<1-phase> <3-phase> : Used to enter parameter mode, monitoring mode and to move
between parameters
⑨ , key: Used to move setting modes and to set parameters.
⑩ key: Used to return to RUN mode from SET mode
Control input
Input type Input selection

Type Parameter In AUTO input, select it at control input type[ IN-P] at
setting mode1.
4-20mA Input 4-20
Current impedance In MANUAL input, set output slope manual adjustment [
0-20mA 100Ω 0-20 A-GA] in operating mode as OFF and select the input by
Analog the inside 3-level slide switch.
1-5VDC 1-5
input
Voltage 0-5VDC Input 0-5 ٧٧Output slope manual adjustment [ A-GA] as OFF
AUTO impedance : Select the input by the inside 3-level slide switch
input 0-10VDC 0-10
25Ω
MAN
Voltage Type Description
pulse
0/12VDC SSR
ON/OFF MAN
input No-voltage MAN
ON/OFF - Adjust output slope with the inside VR
pulse INT
Com. input RS485 - - MAN

COM Adjust output slope with an outside VR
EXT
Inside VR 10kΩ - -
MANUAL input AUTO No function
Outside VR 3 to 10kΩ - -
RMS display AUTO/MANUAL selection by terminal input(DI)

This unit measures and displays RMS for accuracy. [ no. 7, 11 terminal]
※ Ex) At pure resistance load, in normal control, when When the AUTO/MAN terminal input is ON(close), it
input is 4-20mA and rating is 220V, is AUTO input operation. When it is OFF(open), it is
MAN(manual) input operation.
Input 4mA 8mA 12mA 16mA 20mA
When the AUTO/MAN terminal input is OFF(open)
MV 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% (MANUAL operation), only INT or EXT input selected by
Display the 3-level slide switch is available.
0.0V 70V 155.5V 209.7V 220.0V
voltage
In case of static voltage or static current, voltage and

current displays as below.
※Ex) At pure resistance load, in feedback control, when
input is 4-20mA and rating is 220V or 50A,
Input 4mA 8mA 12mA 16mA 20mA

MV 0% 25% 50% 75% 100%
Display voltage
(static voltage 0.0 55.0 110.0 165.0 220.0
control)
Display voltage
(static current 0.0 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0
control)
E-10
Soft Start [ ST-T ] Output slope setting [ SLOP] B. Indicator
When controlling the load which has inrush current This function is to set output changed ratio by control input
(platinum, molybdenum, tungsten, infrared lamp, etc) from 0.00 to 1.00 range. C. Converter
in power ON, or when control input changes rapidly, it •• Output value when setting slope : Input(%)×Slope value
prevents the load to increase output gradually within the
set time. Set the time for soft start. D. Controller
Regardless of control method setting (phase control or

cycle control), it operates as phase control. E. Thyristor
Output slope • unit
Set the time to reach output from 0 to 100%. Output(%)
value(%)
It operates when it is RUN mode from STOP status after F. Pressure
supplying power or reset. When it reaches to the target transmitter
output value, soft start function ends.
G. Temp.
Soft start set time (t) is the time up to 100% increase of transmitter
Control input signal(%)
output applied to load. When the final target output value
is 50%, taken time to reach is t/2.
H. Accessories
Reaching time to the final target output value = Target Output slope manual adjustment [ A-GA ]
output (%)× t
This function is to adjust manually (inside or outside VR)
※ Ex) SOFT START sec., final target output : 80%
output value ratio for control input.
0.8×25 = 20sec When AUTO operation and output slope manual
•• Set range : 0 to 100 sec. (0 sec.: not using this function) adjustment[ A-GA] is set as ON, [ SLOP] is not able to set.
It displays slope value by the inside or outside VR input.
When output applied to load is 100%, 100% of inside or
outside VR
Output(%)
When output applied to load is 50%,
Output(%) 50% of inside or
outside VR
DPU
Time
SOFT START set time

Start limit [ S-LM ] and start limit time [ S-LT ] ٧٧Output slope manual adjustment [ A-GA] as ON
: Set output slope by the inside 3-level slide switch
When power is ON, changing to RUN status from STOP
MAN
status, or alarm reset, set limit output value and time to Type Description
prevent the inrush current or error current. MAN
MAN
Regardless of control method setting (phase control or Adjust output slope with the inside VR
INT
cycle control), it operates as phase control.
MAN
•• Set range for start limit: 0 to 110% of output Adjust output slope with an outside VR
EXT
•• Set range for start limit time : 0 to 100 sec. AUTO No function
(0 sec.: not using this function)
BASE-UP [ B-UP ]
SLOW UP set time
This function is to add base-up set value to input signal. It
is available only when output low-limit value is 0%.
Output(%) It is limited by start limit value at initial start.
•• Set range : BASE-UP SV(%) < Output high-limit value
•• Output value for BASE-UP setting
Start
limit : Input(%)×Slope value+ BASE-UP SV
BASE-UP SV(%)
Time
SOFT START set time SLOW DOWN set time

Start limit set time
• A : SOFT START function ends
• B : SLOW UP function ends
Output(%)
• C : SLOW DOWN function ends
E-11
DPU Series
SLOW UP / SLOW DOWN [ UP-T/ DN-T ] DI(Digital Input)

It is same purpose as soft start function. Soft start starts Below functions are available by terminal input.
only one time at first but slow up/slow down function start Digital input has five terminals; AUTO/MANUAL terminal,
during operation. RUN/STOP terminal, and DI-1 to 3 terminals.
Regardless of control method setting (phase control or Select the function for each input terminal of DI-1 to 3.
cycle control), it operates as phase control.
When it reaches to the target output value, slow up/slow
down functions end.
•• Set range : 0 to 999 sec. (0 sec.: not using this function)
SLOW UP set time
Output(%)
٧٧AUTO/MANUAL selection digital input

[ no. 7 and 11 terminals]
Select AUTO(close)/MANUAL(open) input by terminal
Time input.
SLOW DOWN set time AUTO mode controls output according to control input
SOFT START set time
•• A : SOFT START function ends as analog input (voltage, current) or ON/OFF input
(including SSR pulse input).
•• B : SLOW UP function ends
MANUAL mode controls according to control input as
•• C : SLOW DOWN function ends
the inside VR adjustment or an outside VR adjustment.
When selecting AUTO (close), the front AUTO lamp
Output high/low limit [ H-OL/ L-OL] turns ON or selecting MANUAL(open), the front AUTO
This function is to limit output range to protect load. lamp turns OFF.
•• Set range : 0 to 110%

٧٧RUN/STOP switching digital input
(Output low limit value < Output high limit value)
[ no. 6 and 11 terminal]
Select RUN(close)/STOP(open) operation status by
terminal input.
Output high-limit: H-OL
RUN mode operates as the set contents by control
input. STOP mode is standby status.
Output(%)
When selecting RUN(close), the front RUN lamp turns
ON or selecting STOP(open), the front RUN lamp turns
OFF.
Output low-limit : L-OL
٧٧DI-1 to DI-3(no. 1 to 3 of digital input ) terminal
Control input signal(%) [ no. 8, 9, 10 and 11(COM) terminal]
Select the each function for each digital input at
Current limit [ C-LM ] parameters [ DI-1, DI-2, DI-3].
It operates when normal, static voltage, static current When setting ON(close) to DI input, the front EVT lamp
mode of phase control. turns ON or setting OFF(open), the front EVT lamp
When using the load which has high inrush current, it turns OFF.
restrains the current to protect thyristor. As below, there are 6 functions to select.
Especially, in case of voltage feedback, only voltage ※ SP-M is available only in D1-1.
current, it may over the rated current of thyristor because
Select
current flows by resistance value of the load. To prevent function
No. 8 and 11 terminal
ON (CLOSE)
over the rated current, limit the current.
•• Set range : 0 to 110% of rated current No. 9 and 11 terminal Executes
ON (CLOSE) selected
function
Overcurrent
alarm No. 10 and 11 terminal
ON (CLOSE)
Current
alarm
Over current
alarm point ● RESET [ RST]
After selecting RESET function, turn digital input
Current limit ON(close) and open, this unit resets and re-starts.
Output set point
current
(%)
Current limit set position •

(0 to 110%)
Time
E-12
● HOLD [ HOLD] Proportional and integral constant set of

A. Recorder
feedback control
After selecting HOLD function and digital input is
ON(close), output and display value of this unit is Proportional Integral Control:
hold. (it operates hold when digital input maintains This is the combination of proportional control and integral B. Indicator
ON(close) status.) control. Proportional control operates soft control without
overshoot and hunting for the set value. Integral control C. Converter
● Single SP [ SP-1, SP-2, SP-3] modifies offset automatically to reach the set value stably.
The optimal values of proportional constant and integral
Set [ SP-1, SP-2, SP-3] to each digital input for constant are set as factory defaults. When changing D. Controller
output to reach to the relevant SP. proportional constant and integral constant, it may cause
It is available to set individually at [ DI-1, DI-2, response delay in feedback control or overshoot or E. Thyristor
DI-3], and duplicated setting is allowed. hunting. unit
When setting SP-1,, SP1 is displayed in operating F. Pressure

mode, same as SP-2 and SP-3. ٧٧Proportional constant set [ P] transmitter
When this function is not set, the parameters to set
SP in operating mode are not displayed. It compensates error from the target value G. Temp.
proportionally. transmitter
※ Ex) If proportional constant value is small, response is fast
Operating Mode and it may cause overshoot or hunting. If proportional H. Accessories
DI-1 DI-2 DI-3 constant value is big, response is slow.
SP value set parameter
SP-1(ex:20%) •• Set range : 0(0%) to 2000(100%)
SP-1 SP-2 SP-3 SP-2(ex:40%)
SP-3(ex:60%) ٧٧Integral constant set [ I]
It compensates cumulative error from the target value.

The set integral constant is the time when proportional
Output value and integral value are equal.
(%) If integral constant value is small, response is fast and
• A : When DI-1 is ON
it may cause overshoot or hunting. If integral constant
• B : When DI-2 is ON
value is big, response is slow.
• C : When DI-3 is ON
•• Set range : 0.1 to 999.9 sec.
※ P, Iparameters are displayed when control mode is

● Multi SP [ SP-M]
static voltage, static current, static power mode in phase DPU
It is available to set total 6 SPs and to control output control.
depending on 3 digital inputs' setting.
This function is selectable only in [ DI-1]. When
selecting [ SP-M] at [ DI-1], [ DI-2, DI-3] Input correction [ IN-B]
parameters are not displayed.
It compensates the offset between actual input value and
When selecting [ SP-M] at [ DI-1], 6 parameters to measured input value.
set SPs are displayed in operating mode.
•• Set range : -99.9 to 99.9%
( SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SP-4, SP-5, SP-6)
※ Ex) Input type is 4-20mA,
※ Ex) When 4mA is applied and the input monitor value
displays, set [ IN-B] as -)5 and the input monitor
Operating Mode value displays as 0.0%.
DI-1 DI-2 DI-3 SP value set
parameter
A ○ × × SP-1 (ex:20%)
B × ○ × SP-2 (ex:40%)
C ○ ○ × SP-3 (ex:60%)
Output
D × × ○ SP-4 (ex:80%) input signal
E ○ × ○ SP-5 (ex:100%) (%)
F × ○ ○ SP-6 (ex:0%)
G ○ ○ ○ -
※ ○: Close, ×: Open
Actual input signal (%) Actual input signal(%)
Input corrected signal(%)
Output
(%)
※ A, B, C, D, E, F
: Close/Open status of Digital Input
E-13
DPU Series
Input slope correction [ SPAN] Heater break alarm [ H-BK]

It compensates the gain of the measured 100% input for The principle of heater break alarm is load recognition
actual 100% input value. function. It measures load resistance and when load
•• Set range : -99.9 to 99.9% resistance value is higher than the break alarm SV, this
alarm operate regardless of output.
※ Ex) Input type is 4-20mA,
When 20mA is applied and the input monitor value Full load auto recognition [ F-LD]
displays 99.5%, set [ SPAN] as )5 and the input
monitor value is 100.0%. When operating load recognition function, it outputs 100%
for 3 sec. Do not use this unit to the device which has
problem 100% output of load.
Set [ F-LD] as ON in setting mode 1 [ ST-1] group and
press the key, load auto recognition function operates.
Output According to secular changes of the load, execute this
input signal
(%) function regularly.
※ Be sure that when auto recognition starts, it operates
100% output for 3 sec.
※ Caution
Do not execute this function as ON without profession’s
Actual input signal (%) Actual input signal(%) consultations. When executing this function, voltage,
Input corrected signal(%)
current outputs fully. Be sure that it may cause damage
to the load.
Display value content selection [ D1SP] When using special load using low voltage and high
You can select display value content for the display part in current such as (super)tantalum, SiC, molybdenum,
RUN mode. tungsten, etc, it may cause heater break alarm [ H-BK].
This alarm does not have problem in operation but it
•• Selectable display value content :
occurs when it does not detect the load when using as
load voltage [ U-V, V-W, W-U], load current low voltage. Set the below notes to clear the alarm.
[ LA-U, LA-V, LA-W], power [ KW], control input [ REF]
Note>When using special load such as (super) tantalum, •
SiC, molybdenum, tungsten, H-BK alarm clear
Load resistance display method [ DRES] method:
This function is for display load resistance [ RES] into a · Set load resistance display method [ DRES] as
percentage in monitoring mode when disconnecting the UP in setting mode 1 [ ST-1].
parallel load. You can select this value as increase rate · Set heater break alarm value [ HB-V] as 500 in
of load resistance [ UP] or as decrease rate of number of setting mode 2 [ ST-2].
loads [ DOWN].
※Decrease rate of number of loads [ DOWN] displays
Alarm
correct decrease rate only when the connected each
load resistance is same. Alarm Parameter Operation Clear alarm
Ex)Each of R1 to R10 is 10Ω and load resistance (R) is 1Ω, Overcurrent alarm O-C
·Re-supply the
When disconnecting R1 to R5, Overvoltage alarm O-V Output power.
STOP
Fuse break alarm FUSE (SCR ·RESET( key)
Heatsink overheat alarm TEMP OFF) ·Switch to STOP
mode
Element error alarm SCR
R R1 R2 R9 R10 Current alarm CAL Continues Automatically
cleared within
Heater break alarm HBK operation the set range
① Increase rate of load resistance[ UP]

Lock [ LOCK]
It is based on 100% of load resistance (R), 1 Ω. When
disconnected R1 to R5, load resistance is 2 Ω and load This function is to limit parameter set value check and
resistance [ RES] in monitoring mode displays 200%. change.
② Decrease rate of number of loads [ DOWN] Set this parameter lock function to enter setting mode1.
When setting this parameter lock as LOC2 or LOC3, only
It is based on 100% of 10 loads(R1 to R10). When
parameter lock is displayed in setting mode 1.
disconnected R1 to R5, the number of load are 5(R6
to R10) and load resistance [ RES] in monitoring mode
Parameter OFF LOC1 LOC2 LOC3
displays 50%.
Operating Mode set group
Bar Graph display value content selection [ BAR] Setting Mode 2 set group
You can select display value content for the bar graph. Setting Mode 1 set group
•• Selectable display value content : : Enable to check and set

load voltage [ U-V, V-W, W-U], load current [ LA-U, : Enable to check/Disable to set
LA-V, LA-W], power [ KW], control input [ REF] : Disable to check
E-14
Monitoring mode A. Recorder
Monitoring mode can monitor measured several physical quantities of this unit, not set parameters.
B. Indicator
1-phase
C. Converter
RUN ※ 1.
mode P : Press any key among , .
Press key ※ To return RUN mode, press the key at any parameter, or not to operate any keys D. Controller
for 1 sec. in 30sec.
※1
P E. Thyristor
For ON/OFF input, or SSR pulse input, it displays 0 or 100.
Input value IN 10)0 • Set range : Within 0.0 to 100.0%
unit
F. Pressure
P transmitter
Load voltage LD-V 22)0V Monitors measured voltage at load within the rated voltage range.
G. Temp.
P transmitter
Load current LD-A 5)0A Monitors measured current at load within the rated current range.
H. Accessories
P
Load power KW 1)00 V
A
Monitors measured power at load within the rated power range.
P
Load
resistance
RES 50 Displays measured resistance at load for initial set resistance as per-
centage
P
Power
frequency
FREQ 6)00 Displays frequency of power
3-phase
RUN ※ 1. P : Press any key among , .

mode ※ To return RUN mode, press the key at any parameter, or not to operate any keys DPU
Press key in 30sec.
for 1 sec.
※1
P For ON/OFF input, or SSR pulse input, it displays 0 or 100.
Input value IN )0 • Set range : Within 0.0 to 100.0%
P
Voltage between U--V )0V
U-V line
P
Voltage between V--W )0V Monitors measured voltage at load within the rated voltage range.
V-W line
P
Voltage between W--U )0V
W-U line
P
U-phase• LA-U )0A
load current
P
Monitors measured current at load within the rated current range.
V-phase LA-V )0A
load current
P
W-phase• LA-W )0A
load current
P
Load power KW )00VA Monitors load power output at 3-phase.
P
Load resistance RES )0 Displays LLLL, 10 to 500%, HHHH.
P
Power frequency FREQ )00 Displays frequency of power within 45.0 to 65.0Hz range
E-15
DPU Series
Parameter mode
※ 1. P : Press any key among , .
Operating Mode [ OP]
※ To return RUN mode, press the key at any parameter, or not to operate any keys in 30sec.
RUN
mode ※ : This parameter may or may not appear, depending on the other parameter settings.
Press key
for 3 sec.
Operating mode OP Displays operating mode.
※1
P Set soft start time.
Soft start time ST-T 50 • Set range : 0 to 100sec
Set limit output value.

Start limit S-LM • Set range : 0 to 110%
Set start limit time.

Start limit time S-LT • Set range : 0 to 100sec
Output slope
manual adjustment A-GA Set output slope manual adjustment. ON OFF
Set output change ratio by control input.

Output slope SLOP • Set range : 0.00 to 1.00%
※Not displayed when output slope manual adjustment [ A-GA] is ON.
Set base-up value.
Base up B-UP • Set range : 0 to 100%
Set slow-up time.

Slow up UP-T • Set range : 0 to 999sec
※Not displayed when C-MD mode is set as cycle control.
Set slow-down time.

Slow down DN-T • Set range : 0 to 999sec
※Not displayed when C-MD mode is set as cycle control.
Set output low-limit.

Output low-limit
value
L-OL • Set range : 0 to 110%
Set output high-limit.

Output high-limit
value
H-OL • Set range : 0 to 110%
Set current limit value.

Current limit C-LM • Set range : 0 to 110%
Setting point 1 SP1
Setting point 2 SP2 • Set range : 0 to 100%

※ Displayed only when DI-1 to DI-3 of ST-1 mode is set SP-M or SP1 to SP3.
Setting point 3 SP3
Setting point 4 SP4
Setting point 5 SP5 • Set range : 0 to 100%

※ Displayed only when DI-1 of ST-1 is set SP-M.
Setting point 6 SP6

Set proportional constant.
Proportional
constant
P • Set range : 1 to 2000
※ Displayed only for static voltage, static current, static power in phase control.
Integral constant I Set integral constant.

• Set range : 0.1 to 999.9
※ Displayed only for static voltage, static current, static power in phase control.
E-16
Setting Mode 1 ※ 1. P : Press any key among , .

A. Recorder
※ If there is no operation any keys in 30sec., it returns to RUN mode.
RUN
mode ※ Press the key when entering ST-1 setting mode in any parameters, it moves to ST-1. B. Indicator
Press the key once more, it returns to RUN mode.
Press key
for 3 sec. ※ When setting [ LOCK] as LOC2 or LOC3, and entering ST-1, it displays only [ LOCK] parameter.
C. Converter
Operating Mode Setting Mode 1
OP ST-1 Displays setting mode 1. D. Controller
E. Thyristor
Control input type ※1 unit
P
IN-P 4-20 Select input type.
F. Pressure
transmitter
Control method
G. Temp.
Select control method.
C-MD ※ Variable cycle control[ V-CY] is only for 1-phase model.
transmitter
PA V-FB ㅉC-FB W-FB F-CY ㅉV-CY ONOF H. Accessories
DI-1 function
DI-1
Select digital input.
DI-2 function
※ Multi SP function [ SP-M] is available only in DI-1.
DI-2
SP-M SP-1 SP-2 SP-3 RST HOLD
DI-3 function
DI-3
Input correction
Set input correction value.
IN-B • Set range : -99.9 to 99.9% DPU
Input slope correction

SPAN Set input slope correction value.
• Set range : -99.9 to 99.9%
Display value content

DISP Select display value content. LD-V AMP KW REF
Bar content
BAR Select bar graph display content. V A KW REF
Load resistance •
display method
Select display method of load resistance value. DOWN UP
DRES
Full load auto recognition
Select full load auto recognition enable/disable.
F-LD OFF ON
Com. address ※ Displayed only for RS485 communication option model.

Set communication address.
ADDR • Set range : 1 to 99
Com. speed
BAUD Select communication speed 48 96 192 384
(baud rate).
Com. write
Select communication write enable/disable.
COMW (ENA: Enables to write, DISA: Disables to write)
ENA DISA
Lock
LOCK Select lock function. OFF LOC1 LOC2 LOC3
E-17
DPU Series
Setting Mode 2
※ 1. P : Press any key among , .
RUN
mode ※ If there is no operation any keys in 30sec., it returns to RUN mode.
※ Press the key when entering ST-2 setting mode in any parameters, it moves to ST-2.
Press key
for 3 sec. Press the key once more, it returns to RUN mode.
※ When setting [ LOCK] as LOC2 or LOC3, and entering ST-2, it displays only [ LOCK] parameter.
Operating Mode Setting Mode 1 Setting Mode 2
OP ST-1 ST-2 Displays setting mode 2.
Overcurrent •
alarm value ※1
P Set alarm value for overcurrent.
OC-V 120 • Set range : 0 to 120%
Overcurrent
delay time
Set alarm delay time for overcurrent.
OC-T • Set range : 0 to 100sec
Overcurrent alarm CH
OC-A
Select overcurrent, current alarm channel.
Current alarm CH NON AL1 AL2
C-AL
Overvoltage •
alarm value
Select alarm value for overvoltage.
OV-V • Set range : 0 to 120% for 1-phase model, 0 to 300% for 3-phase
Overvoltage delay time

OV-T Set alarm delay time for overvoltage.
• Set range : 0 to 100sec
Overvoltage alarm CH
OV-A
Fuse break alarm CH

FUSE
Select each alarm channel.
Heat sink overheating
alarm CH NON AL1 AL2
HEAT
Element error •
alarm CH
SCR
Heater break •
alarm value
Set alarm value for heater break.
HB-V • Set range : 10 to 500%
Heater break •
alarm CH
HB-A Select heater break alarm channel.
NON AL1 AL2
E-18
Operating Mode B. Indicator
ST-T 0000 B-UP 00)0 C-LM 11)0 SP5 00)0 C. Converter
S-LM 11)0 UP-T 0003 SP1 00)0 SP6 00)0

D. Controller
S-LT 0000 DN-T 0003 SP2 00)0 P 0150
A-GA OFF L-OL 00)0 SP3 00)0 I 02)0 E. Thyristor
unit
SLOP !000 H-OL 11)0 SP4 00)0
F. Pressure
transmitter
Setting Mode 1
Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default Parameter Default G. Temp.
transmitter
(1-phase)
IN-P 4-20 IN-B 00)0 V COMW ENA
BAR (3-phase)
C-MD PA SPAN 00)0 U-V LOCK OFF H. Accessories
(1-phase)
DI-1 SP-M LD-V F-LD OFF
DISP
DI-2 SP-1 (3-phase) U-V ADDR 0001
DI-3 SP-1 DRES DOWN BAUD 384
Setting Mode 2
OCㅐ-V 11)0 C-AL AL2 OV-A AL1 SCR AL1

OC-T 0005 OV-V 11)0 FUSE AL1 HB-V 01)0
OC-A AL1 OV-T 0005 HEAT AL1 HB-A AL2
DPU
Communications
Communication specification ٧٧Function code 4(0×04) = Read input resisters

● Request (Master → Slave)
Item Specifications
0×01 0×04 0×00 0×00 0×00 0×10 ×× ××
Com. method RS485 2-wire half duplex
Com- Start add. Number of data CRC 16
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps Add.
Com. speed mand High Low High Low High Low
(default 38400)
Data length 8Bit
● Response (Slave → Master)
Stop Bit 1Bit
0×01 0×04 0×10 0×03 0×E8 ... 0×03 0×E8 ×× ××
Parity Even
Response Number 1st data ... 16th data CRC 16
Max. connections 32 units Add.
command of data High Low ... High Low High Low
Protocol MODBUS 1.1 RTU
● Error (Slave → Master)
Function code format 0×01 0×84 ×× ×× ××
Response Exception•
٧٧Function code 3(0×03) = Read holding resisters Address CRC 16
command code
٧٧Function code 6(0×06) = write single resisters
0×01 0×03 0×00 0×00 0×00 0×16 ×× ××
Com- Start add. Number of data CRC 16
Add. 0×01 0×06 0×00 0×00 0×03 0×E8 ×× ××
mand High Low High Low High Low
Com- Address Number of data CRC 16
Add.
● Response mand High Low High Low High Low
(Slave → Master)
0×01 0×03 0×10 0×03 0×E8 ... 0×03 0×E8 ×× ×× ● Response (Slave → Master)
Response Number 1st data ... 16th data CRC 16
0×01 0×06 0×00 0×00 0×03 0×E8 ×× ××
Add.
command of data High Low ... High Low High Low
Response Address Data CRC 16
Add.
Command High Low High Low High Low
0×01 0×83 ×× ×× ×× ● Error (Slave → Master)
Response Exception• 0×01 0×86 ×× ×× ××
Address CRC 16
command code
Address CRC 16
command code
E-19
DPU Series
٧٧Function code 16(0×10) = write multiple resisters

0×01 0×10 0×00 0×00 0×00 0×10 0×20 ×× ××
Number of
Com- Start add. Number CRC 16
Add. data
mand of byte
High Low High Low High Low
● Response (Slave → Master)
0×01 0×10 0×00 0×00 0×03 0×E8 ×× ××
Response Start add. Number of data CRC 16
Add.
command High Low High Low High Low

0×01 0×90 ×× ×× ××
Address CRC 16
Command code
※ Exception code
·0×01 : Not supported command code
·0×02 : Starting address of required data and transmittable address
are different.
·0×03 : The number of required data is over than the number of
transmittable data.
·0×04 : Transmittable data does not process properly.
Address mapping table

٧٧Input resisters [ 1-phase] ٧٧Input resisters [ 3-phase]
Address Item Factor Address Item Factor
30001(0000) Output voltage *0.1 Load voltage between U-V line display
30001(0000) *0.1
(Vrms)
30002(0001) Load current *0.1
Load voltage between V-W line
30003(0002) Power *0.1 30002(0001) *0.1
display(Vrms)
30004(0003) Load resistance *0.1 Load voltage between W-U line
30003(0002) *0.1
30005(0004) Power frequency *0.01 display(Vrms)
30006(0005) W-phase load current display(Arms) *0.1 30004(0003) U-phase load current display(Arms) *0.1
30101(0064) Product No. H 00 30005(0004) V-phase load current display(Arms) *0.1
30102(0065) Product No. L 00 30006(0005) W-phase load current display(Arms) *0.1
30103(0066) Hardware version 10 30007(0006) Power display(kw) *0.01
30104(0067) Software version 10 Load resistance display•
30008(0007) *0.1
(% display for initial load)
30105(0068) Model name 1 "DP"
30009(0008) Power frequency display *0.01
30106(0069) Model name 2 "2-"
30101(0064) Product No. H 00
30107(006A) Model name 3 "00"
30102(0065) Product No. L 00
30108(006B) Model name 4 " "
30103(0066) Hardware version 10
30109(006C) Model name 5 " "
30104(0067) Software version 10
30110(006D) Model name 6 " "
30105(0068) Model name 1 "DP"
30111(006E) Model name 7 " "
30106(0069) Model name 2 "2-"
30112(006F) Model name 8 " "
30107(006A) Model name 3 "00"
30113(0070) Model name 9 " "
30108(006B) Model name 4 " "
30114(0071) Model name 10 " "
30109(006C) Model name 5 " "
30115(0072) Reserved Reserved
30110(006D) Model name 6 " "
30111(006E) Model name 7 " "
30112(006F) Model name 8 " "
30118(0075) Coil start address 0
30113(0070) Model name 9 " "
30119(0076) Coil quantity 0
30114(0071) Model name 10 " "
30120(0077) Input start address 0
30121(0078) Input quantity 0
30122(0079) Holding reg start address 0
30123(007A) Holding reg quantity 32
30118(0075) Coil start address 0
30124(007B) Input reg start address 0
30119(0076) Coil quantity 0
30125(007C) Input reg quantity 5
30120(0077) Input start address 0
30121(0078) Input quantity 0
30122(0079) Holding reg start address 0
30123(007A) Holding reg quantity 32
30124(007B) Input reg start address 0
30125(007C) Input reg quantity 5
E-20

A. Recorder
٧٧Holding resisters [ 1-phase]
Address Item Factor B. Indicator
40001(0000) Reference value * 0.1(1 to 1000)
40002(0001) Start Time 0 to 99
C. Converter
40003(0002) Start limit * 0.1(1 to 1000)
40004(0003) Soft Start Time 0 to 99
D. Controller
40005(0004) Output high-limit limit * 0.1(1 to 1100)
40006(0005) Output low-limit limit * 0.1(1 to 1000)
E. Thyristor
40007(0006) Remote Sp1 value * 0.1(1 to 1000) unit
40008(0007) Remote Sp2 value * 0.1(1 to 1000)
F. Pressure
40009(0008) Remote Sp3 value * 0.1(1 to 1000) transmitter
40010(0009) Remote Sp4 value * 0.1(1 to 1000)
G. Temp.
40011(000A) Remote Sp5 value * 0.1(1 to 1000)
transmitter
40012(000B) Remote Sp6 value * 0.1(1 to 1000)
40013(000C) Slow up time 0 to 99 H. Accessories
40014(000D) Slow stop time 0 to 99
40015(000E) CL value * 0.1(1 to 2000)
40016(000F) OC value * 0.1(1 to 1100)
40017(0010) OC time 0 to 99
40018(0011) OV value * 0.1(1 to 1100)
40019(0012) OV time 0 to 99
40020(0013) Load detector alarm value * 0.1(1 to 2000)
40021(0014) Display content selection 0 to 3
40022(0015) Bar display mode 0 to 3
40023(0016) Control integer KP value 0 to 9999
40024(0017) Control integer KI value * 0.1(1 to 999.9)
40025(0018) Output control mode 0 to 6
40026(0019) Event input 1 mode 0 to 4 DPU
40027(001A) Event input 2 mode 0 to 4
40028(001B) Event input 3 mode 0 to 4
40029(001C) Auto ref input selector 0 to 3
40030(001D) Load resistance display method 0 to 1
Bit0... Fault
Bit1... I-OC
Bit2... Over current
Bit3... Over volt
Bit4... Over temp
Bit5... Fuse cut
Operation status Bit6... Phase loss
40031(001E)
0×0000 Bit7... Load open
Bit8... Over SCR
Bit9... Over Freq
Bit10... Run/Stop
Bit11... Auto/Manual
Bit12... EMS Power
Bit13... Not Load
40032(001F) Output slope(%) 0 to 2
40033(0020) Output for 0% input(%) 0 to 2
40034(0021) Input correction 0 to 2
40035(0022) Input slope correction 0 to 2
40036(0023) Overcurrent alarm output 0 to 2
40037(0024) Current alarm output 0 to 2
40038(0025) Overvoltage alarm output 0 to 2
40039(0026) Fuse break alarm output 0 to 2
40040(0027) Frequency error alarm output 0 to 2
40041(0028) Heatsink overheat alarm output 0 to 2
40042(0029) Element error alarm output 0 to 2
40044(002A) Heater break alarm output 0 to 2
E-21
DPU Series

٧٧Holding resisters [ 3-phase]
Address Item Parameter Factor
40001(0000) Reference value IN 0.0 to 100.0 (*0.1)
40002(0001) Soft start time ST-T 0 to 100 (*1)
40003(0002) Start limit S-LM 0.0 to 110.0 (*0.1)
40004(0003) Start limit time S-LT 0 to 100 (*1)
40005(0004) High output limit H-OL 0.0 to 110.0 (*0.1)
40006(0005) Low output limit L-OL 0.0 to 110.0 (*0.1)
40007(0006) SP1 SP-1 0.0 to 100.0 (*0.1)
40008(0007) SP2 SP-2 0.0 to 100.0 (*0.1)
40009(0008) SP3 SP-3 0.0 to 100.0 (*0.1)
40010(0009) SP4 SP-4 0.0 to 100.0 (*0.1)
40011(000A) SP5 SP-5 0.0 to 100.0 (*0.1)
40012(000B) SP6 SP-6 0.0 to 100.0 (*0.1)
40013(000C) Slow up UP-T 0 to 999 (*1)
40014(000D) Slow down DN-T 0 to 999 (*1)
40015(000E) Current limit C-LM 0.0 to 110.0 (*0.1)
40016(000F) Over current value OC-V 0.0 to 120.0 (*0.1)
40017(0010) Over current time OC-T 0 to 100 (*1)
40018(0011) Over voltage value OV-V 0.0 to 300.0 (*0.1)
40019(0012) Over voltage time OV-T 0 to 100 (*1)
40020(0013) Heater break value HB-V 10.0 to 500.0 (*0.1)
0: U-V 1: V-W
40021(0014) Display selected contents DISP
2: W-U 3: LA-U
0 to 7 (*1)
4: LA-V 5: LA-W
40022(0015) Bar graph's content BAR
6: KW 7: REF
40023(0016) Proportional value P 1 to 2000 (*1)
40024(0017) Integral value I 0.1 to 999.9 (*0.1)
1: F-CY 2: ONOF
40025(0018) Control method C-MD 1 to 6 (*1) 3: PA 4: V-FB
5: C-FB 6: W-FB
0: SP-M 1: SP-1
40026(0019) Digital input 1 DI-1 0 to 5 (*1) 2: SP-2 3: SP-3
4: RST 5: HOLD
40027(001A) Digital input 2 DI-2 1: SP-1 2: SP-2
1 to 5 (*1) 3: SP-3 4: RST
40028(001B) Digital input 3 DI-3 5: HOLD
0: 4-20 1: 0-20
2: 1-5 3: 0-5
40029(001C) Control input type IN-P 0 to 6 (*1)
4: 0-10 5: SSR
6: COM
40030(001D) Load resistance display method selection DRES 0 to 1(*1) 0: DOWN 1: UP
Bit0... Fault
Bit1... I-OC
Bit2... Over current
Bit3... Over volt
Bit4... Over temp
Bit5... Fuse cut
40031(001E) Operation status - Bit6... Phase loss
Bit7... Load open
Bit8... Over SCR
Bit9... Over Freq
Bit10... Run/Stop
Bit11... Auto/Manual
Bit12... EMS Power
40032(001F) Output slope SLOP 0.000 to 1.000 (*0.001)
40033(0020) Base up setting B-UP 0.0 to 100.0 (*0.1)
40034(0021) Input correction IN-B -99.9 to +99.9 (*0.1)
40035(0022) Span SPAN -99.9 to +99.9 (*0.1)
40036(0023) Over current alarm OC-A
40037(0024) Current alarm C-AL
40038(0025) Over voltage alarm OV-A
40039(0026) Burn out fuse alarm FUSE 0 to 2 (*1) 0: NON 1: AL1
40041(0028) Heat sink temperature abnormal condition alarm HEAT 2: AL2
40042(0029) Thyristor abnormal condition alarm SCR
40044(002B) Heater break alarm HB-A
E-22
A. Recorder
B. Indicator
C. Converter
D. Controller
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
H. Accessories
DPU
E-23
TPS20 Series
Features
•• 4-20 mA analog signal (2-wire) transmission by

measuring pressure of gas, liquid, and vapor
•• High accuracy(±0.3％F.S.) with stainless steel
diaphragm for various measurement
•• Various model for installation environments
: Head type, DIN connector type, •
Connector cable type
•• Built-in zero-point, span adjustment•
(Head type)
Please read “Caution for your safety” in operation manual [Head type] [DIN connector type] [Connector cable type]
TPS20 G 1 1 F8 00
00 Not used
Connector 2I " I " type 2 m
cable※1
2L " L " type 2 m
5I " I " type 5 m
5L " L " type 5 m
P2 PT 1/2 (with adapter)

Pressure port P8 PT 3/8 (with adapter)
F8 PF 3/8 (Standard)
ZZ Others
1 0 to 0.2 kgf/cm2 (G)

2 0 to 0.5 kgf/cm2 (G)
3 0 to 1 kgf/cm2 (G,A)
6 0 to 10 kgf/cm2 (G,A)
7 0 to 20 kgf/cm2 (G,A)
8 0 to 35 kgf/cm2 (G,A)
9 0 to 70 kgf/cm2 (G)
Pressure range A 0 to 100 kgf/cm2 (G)
C 0 to 200 kgf/cm2 (G)
F 0 to 300 kgf/cm2 (G)
H 0 to 350 kgf/cm2 (G)
M -760 mmHg to 0 kgf/cm2 (G)
O -760 mmHg to 1 kgf/cm2 (G)
Q -760 mmHg to 7 kgf/cm2 (G)
V -760 mmHg to 10 kgf/cm2 (G)
X -760 mmHg to 20 kgf/cm2 (G)
Y -760 mmHg to 35 kgf/cm2 (G)
Z Others
1 Head type
Connector
2 DIN connector type
3 Connector cable type
Measurement presssure G Gauge pressure

A Absolute pressure
Item
TPS20 Pressure Transmitter
※ 1 : For ordering cable, order as TPS2I, TPS2L, TPS5I, TPS5L. (sold separately)
F-2
Pressure Transmitter
Dimensions A. Recorder
(unit:mm)
● Head type ● DIN connector type ● Connector cable type B. Indicator
84 •• L type •• I type C. Converter

46.5
D. Controller
Ø22
E. Thyristor
Ø22 unit
132
119.5
104
106
Ø26.8 F. Pressure
transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
PF3/8 PF3/8 PF3/8
PF3/8 Ø30
H. Accessories
※ The standard pressure port for above is PF 3/8.
Connections
● Head type ● Connector cable type
Pin Pin Function

1 +
+
2 N.C
TPS20
3 F.G.
-
4 -
KT-302H
● DIN connector type PTF30
Pin Function
1 +
2 -
3 N.C
F.G.
● Example of external connections

KRN100
Terminal
+ - +
TPS20
-
+ +
24 VDC
-
-
4-20 mA
Power 24 VDC load 600 Ω
Output 4-20 mA 2 wire
F-3
TPS20 Series
Specifications
Series TPS20
Measured materials Vapor, Liquid, Fluid (except corrosive environment of SUS316)
-760 mmHg to 0 to 30 kg/cm2 (compound pressure)
Measurement range 0 to 0.2 to 350 kg/cm2 (gauge pressure)
0 to 1.0 to 35 kg/cm2 (absolute pressure)
Allowable over pressure 300% of max. span
Power 15-35 VDC
Electrical Output 4-20 mA

characteristics Load resistance Min. 600 Ω
Power consumption 0.5 W
±0.3％F.S.(-10 to 50 ℃)
Linearity
Accuracy ±0.5％F.S.(50 to 70 ℃)
Hysteresis ±0.3% F.S.
Temperature ZERO ±0.03%F.S.

characteristics SPAN ±0.03%F.S. (at 25 ℃)
Response time Max. 100 ms
Pressure port PF 3/8(standard), PT 3/8, PT 1/2
Ambient
-10 to 70 ℃
Environment temperature
Ambient humidity 5 to 95% RH
Materials Sealing : SUS316, O-ring : fluoro rubber, Diaphragm : SUS316, Connection : SUS316
Case structure Drip-proof structure
Approval
Unit weight Approx. 320 g (based on head type)
※ F.S.(Full Scale): It is rated pressure range.

Troubleshooting
Error Troubleshooting
Do you supply the power?
No outputs Do you wire (+, -) it correctly?
Is the connection part poor?
Is power supplied properly?
Abnormally fluctuating output Is pressure supplied correctly?
Is there error in pressure line?
Is power supplied properly?
Is the load resistive value of a receiver over 600 Ω?
Out of zero point output value
Is the measuring point and transmission distance proper?
Is line resistance big? (max. 600 Ω)
F-4
Pressure Transmitter
Caution for using

B. Indicator
•• When installing this unit on pipe line, use the hexagon •• Install a power switch or a circuit breaker to supply or
part of connections not to turn this unit with a pipe cut off the power. C. Converter
wrench. Do not use this unit with strong vibrations. •• Switch or circuit breaker should be installed nearby
•• This unit is manufactured with precisely. If you drop or users for convenient control.
shock this unit, it may lose the function. Please treat this D. Controller
•• Do not use this unit near the high frequency instruments
unit carefully. (high frequency welding machine & sewing machine,
•• Store this unit at the place without moisture, dust, and large capacity SCR controller). E. Thyristor
unit
vibration. •• This unit cannot be repaired due to disassembled
•• This product which does not have drive part at sensing structure. F. Pressure
part does not need to repair it. Even though inside •• This unit is fixed with bolt and nut at the both sides of transmitter
of pressure pipe is normally clean, it needs to take case. Do not press excessive load (approx. 300kg/cm2),
maintenance once a year as belows. or it may cause damage to this unit. G. Temp.
transmitter
① Check the broken status of outside. •• Tighten lever of electrical connection firmly for spinning
② Check the pressure slot, cleanliness inside, and not to enter water to cable. H. Accessories
corrosion state. •• Installation environment
③ Short each terminal and check the insulation
① Indoor / Outdoor
resistance between the case and power.•
(at 100 VDC, over 10 MΩ) ② Altitude max. 2,000 m
③ Pollution Degree 2
④ Check zero, span adjustment and linearity by
pressure standards.
④ Installation Category II
•• When removing a sensor for maintenance, follow the

belows.
① Replace an O-ring which is used once.
② Be sure that diaphragm part is not damaged.
•• In case of head type for connecting the power, use a
crimp terminal(M3.5, min. 7.2 mm).
•• The connection of this unit should be separated from
TPS20
inductive noise.
KT-302H
PTF30
F-5
KT-302H Series
Features
•• HART protocol
•• 330° rotatable display for environment conditions
•• Backlight helps to read easily in the darkness
•• Standard and high accuracy sensor
•• Self stability and filter device
•• High electrical compatibility
•• Realizes high accuracy(±0.2%) measurement by
stainless steel diaphragm of pressure sensing part
for various measured subjects
•• 4-20 mA analog output (2-wire)
•• Explosion-proof structure : Ex d IIC T6 (IP67)

KT-302H S 01 0 0
Pressure port 0 PF 3/8(Standard)
1 Others
Mounting bracket 0 Without bracket
1 With bracket
01 0 to 0.35 kgf/cm2(G, A) 08 0 to 210 kgf/cm2(G)
02 0 to 1 kgf/cm (G, A)
2
09 0 to 350 kgf/cm2(G)
03 0 to 2 kgf/cm (G, A)
2
14 -760 mmHg to 0 kgf/cm2(G)
Pressure range
04 0 to 7 kgf/cm (G, A)
2
15 -760 mmHg to 2 kgf/cm2(G)
05 0 to 20 kgf/cm2(G, A) 16 -760 mmHg to 7 kgf/cm2(G)
06 0 to 35kgf/cm2(G, A) 17 -760mmHg to 20kgf/cm2(G)
07 0 to 70kgf/cm2(G) 18 -760mmHg to 35kgf/cm2(G)
Z Others
Measured pressure S Gauge pressure

A Absolute pressure
Item
KT-302H Pressure Transmitter
Specifications
Series KT-302H
Measured materials Vapor, Liquid, Fluid (except corrosive environment of SUS316)
Power supply 9-45 VDC
Display method PV display part : 7 Segment 5 digit, Parameter display part: 16 Segment 8 digit, Bar LED : 52EA
Display range -19999 to 99999
4-20 mA (2-wire)
Output
Low-limit 3.8 mA, High-limit 22.8 mA
Accuracy ±0.2% of Span
Setting method Setting by front push keys
Sampling cycle 200ms
Ambient
Environment -20 to 70 ℃, storage: -40 to 85 ℃
temperature
Material Body : Aluminum(AlDc.8S), Cover O-Ring : Buna N, Diaphragm : SUS316, Connections : SUS316
Explosion-proof
Ex d IIC T6(IP67)
structure
Unit weight Approx. 2 kg
F-6
Smart Pressure Transmitter
83 142 (unit:mm)
B. Indicator
C. Converter
Ø83
96
D. Controller
153
E. Thyristor
unit
2-(1/2 14NPT)
F. Pressure
transmitter
G. Temp.
55 transmitter
● Mounting bracket 215 H. Accessories

96
200
(2-Pipe)
DN50
TPS20
Mounting bracket
94 KT-302H
● Opening cover PTF30
To open the cover, unscrew the M3 X 6L headless

bolt using a 1.5 hexagon wrench and rotate the cover.
Connections Part descriptions

②
Power
- +
1 2 3 4 5 6
③ ④
Power
Supply
HART
Communicator
Indicator
Recorder
DCS
Controller ① Display part: Displays measured value and unit messages.
② key: Enters set mode and saves the set values.
③ key: Changes the set values of data.
④ key: Changes the set position of data.
F-7
KT-302H Series
Parameters Current Trim adjustment
※ Do not press the and keys at the same time , or the ① Select the '1. Device Setup' by , keys and press the
product is initialized and does not operate. key.
※ Shaded parameters are able to change SV. 1. Device Setup

※ Below displays for parameters are different by models. 2. PV
3. PV Ao
4. PV LRV
5. URV
RUN
mode
② Select the '2. Diag/Service' by , keys and press the
key.
key
1. Process Variables
Set ZERO value by the , keys 2. Diag/Service
and save SV by pressing the 3. Basic Setup
key. 4. Detailed Setup
5. Review
key
Set SPAN value by the , keys

and save SV by pressing the ③ Select the '4. D/A trim' by , keys and press the key.
key. 1. Test device
2. Loop test
key
3. Calibration
Set dAMP value by the , keys 4. D/A trim
and save SV by pressing the
key.
④ Press the (F4) key.
key
WARN-Loop should be
removed from
Set dISP value by the key and
automatic control
save SV by pressing the key.
ABORT OK
key
Execute loop test by the key. ⑤ Press the (F4) key.

※When changing the loop, execute
the loop test by the key. Connect reference
meter
key ABORT OK
⑥ Press the (F4) key.
Setting fid dev

output to 4mA
ABORT OK
⑦ Press the (F4) key to set 4 mA display value.

Enter meter Value
4.000
HELP DEL ABORT ENTER
⑧ If output display value is correct, select '1. Yes' and press

the (F4) key. If not, select '2. No' and press the
(F4) key and re-set the display value.
Ex)If output display value is 3.89mA, select 3.89 and press
the (F4) key.
Fid dev output 4.000

mA equal to reference
meter ?
1. Yes
2. No ABORT ENTER
F-8
Smart Pressure Transmitter
⑨ Press the (F4) key. ■ Caution for using

B. Indicator
Setting fid dev. •• For connecting the power, use a crimp terminal •
output to 20mA (M3.5, min. 7.2 mm). C. Converter
ABORT OK •• The connection of this unit should be separated from
inductive noise. D. Controller
⑩ Press the (F4) key to set 20 mA display value.
•• Install a power switch or a circuit breaker to supply or
Enter meter Value cut off the power. E. Thyristor
unit
20.000 •• Switch or circuit breaker should be installed nearby
HELP DEL ABORT ENTER users for convenient control. F. Pressure
transmitter
⑪ If output display value is correct, select '1. Yes' and press large capacity SCR controller). G. Temp.
transmitter
•• Installation environment.
① Indoor / Outdoor H. Accessories
Fid dev output 20.000 ② Altitude max. 2,000 m

③ Pollution degree 2
meter ?
1. Yes
2. No ABORT ENTER
⑫ Press the (F4) key.
NOTE-Loop may be
returned to automatic
control
ABORT OK
TPS20
⑬ Press the (F3) key.
Diag/Service KT-302H
1. Test device
2. Loop test
3. Calibration PTF30
4. D/A trim
HELP SAVE HOME
⑭ Press the (F3) key.
Device Disconnected
RETRY QUIT
⑮ Press the (F3) key to complete the adjustment.
1. Offline
2. Online
3. Frequency Device
4. Utility
F-9
PTF30 Series
Features
•• Best pressure transmission solution for small and

middle sized project such as indoor heating and air
conditioning, water and sewer, or incinerator, etc.
•• Improves noise resistance and minimize effects by
external disturbance
•• Realizes high accuracy measurement by stainless
steel diaphragm of pressure sensing part for various
measured subjects
•• 4-20 mA analog output (2-wire)
•• Various functions :
User input range, display scale, output scale, digital
filter, multi-display selection, error display, TUF (two
unit function), etc.
•• Explosion-proof structure : Ex d ⅡC T6 (IP67)

PTF30 G 6 N N F8 (0 to 7 kgf/cm2)
User
pressure range
User pressure range ※1
Pressure port
F8 PF 3/8
Communication output N Without bracket
B With bracket
HART communication output
N None
1 0 to 0.35 kgf/cm2 (G, A)

2 0 to 1 kgf/cm2 (G, A)
3 0 to 2 kgf/cm2 (G, A)
4 0 to 7 kgf/cm2 (G, A)
5 0 to 20 kgf/cm2 (G, A)
6 0 to 35 kgf/cm2 (G, A)
7 0 to 70 kgf/cm2 (G)
Pressure range
8 0 to 200 kgf/cm2 (G)
9 0 to 350 kgf/cm2 (G)
A -257 mmHg to 0 kgf/cm2 (G)
C -760 mmHg to 0 kgf/cm2 (G)
F -760 mmHg to 2 kgf/cm2 (G)
H -760 mmHg to 7 kgf/cm2 (G)
M -760 mmHg to 20 kgf/cm2 (G)
O -760 mmHg to 35 kgf/cm2 (G)
Z Others
Measurement pressure G Gauge pressure
A Absolute pressure
Item
PTF30 Pressure Transmitter
※ 1. Write the desired pressure range and it is the default of user pressure range.
F-10
Standard Pressure Transmitter
Dimensions Connections A. Recorder
(unit:mm)
83 128 B. Indicator
C. Converter
3
m /h psi MPa mbar kg/cm2
ton/h mmHg mmH20 kPa
%
83
96
mA
D. Controller
E. Thyristor
Ampere unit
2-1/2-14(NPT) meter
F. Pressure
※ You can check 4-20 mA output by connecting an transmitter
55 ampere meter. (impedance: max. 30 Ω)
G. Temp.
transmitter
● Mounting bracket
H. Accessories
3
m /h psi MPa mbar kg/cm2
ton/h mmHg mmH20 kPa
%
96
mA
200
(2-Pipe)
DN50
Mounting bracket
94
TPS20
Specifications
KT-302H
Series PTF30
Measured materials Vapor, Liquid, Fluid (except corrosive environment of SUS316) PTF30
Power supply 15-35 VDC

Display method 4 digit 12 Segment LCD Display
Character size W 6.24×H10.73 mm (12 Segment) / W1.45×H2.5 mm (unit)
DC4-20 mA 2-wire
Output
Low-limit : 3.6 mA(-2.5%), High-limit : 21.6 mA (+10%)
ᆞᆞ10% of Span < URL: ±(0.05 + 0.015 URL/Span)% of Span
Accuracy※1
ᆞᆞ10% of Span ≥ URL: ±0.2% of Span
Temperature characteristics At 20 ℃, ±(0.075% × URL + 0.15% × Span)
Setting method Setting by front push keys
Sampling cycle 300 ms
Dielectric resistance 1000 VAC for 1 min. (between external terminal and case)
Noise resistance Square shaped noise by noise simulator (pulse width 1 ㎲)±240 V
Memory protection Approx. 10 years (non-volatile semiconductor memory type)
Environ- Ambient temperature -20 to 70 ℃, storage: -20 to 80 ℃

ment Ambient humidity 0 to 85%RH
Material Body : Aluminum(AlDc.8S), Cover O-Ring : Buna N, Diaphragm : SUS316, Connections : SUS316
Explosion-proof structure Ex d IIC T6 (IP67)
Approval
Unit weight 1.2 kg
※ 1. Span: User pressure range[ L-R G to H-R G]
URL: Pressure range by model
F-11
PTF30 Series
Part descriptions
① Display part: Displays detected pressure value, several setting value and
errors.
②
② Unit display part: Displays the currently set input unit.
① ③ Output scale bar graph: Displays output 4-20 mA as scale bar graph by
5% unit.
③ ④ key: Used to enter parameter mode, move parameters and save SV.
⑥ ⑤ 1, 4, 3 key: Used to enter parameter set mode, move digits.
⑥ D.IN3 : Press the 4 and 3 keys at the same time for 3 sec., the set
function (display HOLD, zero-point adjustment) at DI-K in parameter.
④ ⑤
Pressure conversion chart
gf/cm2 kgf/cm2 Pa kPa MPa mbar bar mmH2O psi mmHg

1 gf/cm 2
1 0.001000 98.0665 0.0980665 0.000098 0.980665 0.000981 10.00000 0.014223 0.735559
1 kgf/cm2 1000.000 1 98066.50 98.06650 0.098067 980.665 0.980665 10000.00 14.22334 735.5592
1 Pa 0.010197 0.0000102 1 0.001000 0.000001 0.01 0.000010 0.101972 0.000145 0.007501
1 kPa 10.19716 0.010197 1000.000 1 0.001000 10 0.010000 101.9716 0.145038 7.500617
1 MPa 10197.16 10.19716 1000000 1000.000 1 10000 10.00000 101971.6 145.0378 7500.617
1 mbar 1.019716 0.0010197 100.0000 0.100000 0.000100 1 0.001000 10.19716 0.014504 0.750062
1 bar 1019.716 1.019716 100000.0 100.0000 0.100000 1000 1 10197.16 14.50377 750.0617
1 mmH2O 0.100000 0.000100 9.80665 0.009807 0.0000098 0.0980665 0.000098 1 0.001422 0.073556
1 psi 70.30699 0.070307 6894.757 6.894757 0.006895 68.94757 0.068948 703.0696 1 51.71493
1 mmHg 1.359510 0.001360 133.3224 0.133322 0.0001333 1.333224 0.001333 13.59510 0.019337 1
Factory default

UNIT BAR L-SC 00)0 lOUT )000 ※1
DSP1 PV
L-RG )000※1 H-SC 10)0 hOUT )350※1 DSP2 PV
H-RG )350 ※1
ZERO 000 MAvF 04 TUF OFF
dP )350※1 SPAN !000 DI-K HOLD LOCK OFF
※ 1. Defaults are different by the pressure range by each model.
Functions
Input unit [ UNIT] Display scale [ L-SC, H-SC]

You can select input unit. This function is to set (-1999 to 9999) for particular high/
( bar, mbar, Pa, kPa, MPa, gf/cm2, kgf/cm2, mmH2O, psi, low limit value in order to display high/low limit value of
mmHg, %, OFF ) measurement input. If measurement inputs are ‘a’ and ‘b’
and particular values are ‘A’ and ‘B’, it will display a=A,
b=B as below graphs.
User input range [ L-RG, H-RG]
Even though each unit has the range, you can set user
Display Display
input range within the pressure range when input range is Display
limited for actual usage.
Input Input
Decimal point setting [ dP] Input
This function is to change decimal point digit for input

display value. ※ This function is available only when input unit is % [ ?/O]
When input unit is set as % [ ?/O] or OFF [ OFF], only the or OFF [ OFF].
display position of decimal point is moved.
•• Set range : 0 / 0.0 / 0.00 / 0.000
※ Set range is different by the pressure range.
F-12
Zero-point correction [ ZERO] High/Low peak monitoring [ lPEK, hPEK]

A. Recorder
It corrects the error of display value for 0% input. This function is to save high/low peak to check the
•• Set range : -999 to 999 invisible abnormal condition of system. Select this function
display selection [ dSP1, dSP2] parameter. B. Indicator
Output
When the high/low peak is out of the temperature range, it
displays H H H H or LLLL. C. Converter
To initialize high/low peak, press the 4, 3 keys at the
same time for 3 sec. at [ hPEK] or [ lPEK].
D. Controller
In this case, peak value is the present input value.
Input
E. Thyristor
unit
Slope correction [ SPAN] Two Unit Function [ TUF]

F. Pressure
It corrects the error of display value for 100% input. For compound pressure model, this function displays the transmitter
input pressure which is below atmospheric pressure by
•• Set range : 0.900 to 1.100
mmHg unit. It displays the input pressure atmospheric G. Temp.
transmitter
Output
pressure or over atmospheric pressure by the set pressure
unit.
H. Accessories
Display
Input
Input
Output scale [ lOUT, hOUT]
For 4-20 mA current output, this function is set to display
value for current output.
Set the display value for 4 mA [ lOUT] and the display
value for 20 mA [ hOUT]. Lock [ LOCK]
Output Output
O FF LOc1 LOc2
TPS20
Parameter ● ◐ ○
●: Enable to check/set, ◐: Enable to check, disable to set,

KT-302H
○: Disable to check/set
Input Input ※ In LOc2, only the LOCK parameter displays.
lOUT hOUT lOUT hOUT
PTF30
Parameter initialization [ INIT]
Digital filter [ MAvF] To initialize all parameter as factory default, supply the
Digital filter is able to display stably and output the noise power to the product with pressing the key and 1 key
from input line and irregular signals. This unit applies at the same time and it enters initialization parameter.
moving average digital filter and display cycle is same.
•• Set range : 01 to 16 Supply the power with pressing the
※ when setting as 01, digital filter function does not run.) + 1 keys at the same time.
Digital input [ DI-K] CLR

By front keys operation (D.IN3: 4 + 3 for 3 sec.), one of
two functions executes as the below table.
3
Function Operation NO 4
YES
Temporarily indicated value is stopped
Display
HOLD HOLD
in order to confirm indicated value in
unstable input. Completes initialization.
Zero- It is same function as [ZERO]. When

point
Z-TM adjust-
executing this function, you can check Error
and change correction value at ZERO.
ment
Multi-display selection [ DSP1, DSP2]
HHHH pressure is higher than the Adjust measured
Select one for display 1 and display 2 among PV, OUT, 'pressure range'. pressure within
lPEK, hPEK. Set DSP1 and DSP2 differently and it Flashes when measured the 'pressure
displays two different values in turn for 2 sec. When LLLL pressure is lower than the range'.
selecting lPEK(hPEK), the left (or the right) of output 'pressure range’.
scale bar graph flashes for 0.5 sec.
Re-set it after
Flashes when there is error to
ERR SV checking the
setting conditions
F-13
PTF30 Series
Parameters

RUN mode
※ 2. 1: Moves digits / 4, 3: Changes SV.
※ 4. Defaults are different by the pressure range by each model.
※ After entering setting group, press the M key for 3 sec. or there is no additional key operation
Input unit ※1 ※2
S
UNIT BAR Select input unit.
※3
BAR mBAR PA KPA MPA gCM
OFF ?/O mmHG PSI mmH2 KgCM
Low-limit input value

S Set low-limit input value of input range.
※4
L-RG ---- •• Set range : within the pressure range of input type
High-limit input value

S Set high-limit input value of input range.
※4
H-RG ---- •• Set range : within the pressure range of input type
Decimal point
position
S Select the decimal point position of display scale value.
※4
dP ---- ※ Set range is different by the pressure range.
)0 )00 )000 0
Low-limit scale value

S Set low-limit scale value.
L-SC 00)0 • Set range : -1999 to 9999
※ Displayed only when selecting input unit [ UNIT] as % [ ?/O] or OFF [ OFF].
High-limit scale value

S Set high-limit scale value.
H-SC 10)0 • Set range : -1999 to 9999
※ Displayed only when selecting input unit [ UNIT] as % [ ?/O] or OFF [ OFF].
Zero-point correction
S Corrects occurring error at 0% input.
ZERO 000 • Set range : -999 to 999
Slope correction
S Corrects occurring error at 100% input.
SPAN !000 • Set range : 0.900 to 1.100
Low-limit output
scale value
S Set low-limit output scale value.
※4
lOUT ---- • Set range : Within temperature range when input unit is standard pressure unit.
Within display scale range when input unit is % or OFF.
High-limit output
scale value
S
Set high-limit output scale value.
※4
hOUT ---- • Set range : Within temperature range when input unit is standard pressure unit.
Within display scale range when input unit is % or OFF.
Moving average
digital filters
MAvF 04 • Set range : 01 to 16
F-14
A. Recorder
Digital input B. Indicator

DI-K HOLD ※ Press the 4, 3 keys for 3 sec. at the same time and it executes the selected function.
C. Converter
HOLD Z-TM
D. Controller
Display 1 selection
S E. Thyristor
Select the value type for display 1.
DSP1 PV unit
PV OUT lPEK hPEK F. Pressure

transmitter
Display 2 selection
S Select the value type for display 2.
DSP2 PV G. Temp.
transmitter
PV OUT lPEK hPEK
H. Accessories
Two Unit Function ※ Displayed only for compound pressure model

S Set whether using two unit function.
TUF OFF
OFF ON
Lock
LOCK OFF
OFF LOc1 LOc2
TPS20
Proper usage
KT-302H
Caution for using

PTF30
•• For connecting the power, use a crimp terminal
(M3.5, min. 7.2 mm).
•• The connection of this unit should be separated from
inductive noise.
•• Install a power switch or a circuit breaker to supply or
cut off the power.
•• Switch or circuit breaker should be installed nearby
users for convenient control.
•• When supplying input, if H H H H or LLLL is displayed,
and check the line.
•• Installation environment
① Indoor / Outdoor
② Altitude max. 2,000 m
③ Pollution Degree 2
④ Installation Category II
F-15
KT-502H
Features
• HART protocol
• 330° rotatable display for environment conditions
• 4-20 mA analog output (2-wire)
• Various input
RTD: 8 types, Thermocouple: 8 types,
mV: 4 types, Ω: 2 types
• Backlight helps to read easily in the darkness
• Explosion-proof structure : Ex d IIC T6(IP67)

KT 502H 0
Mounting bracket 0 Without bracket

1 With bracket
Specifications
Model KT-502H
Power supply 10.5-45VDC (with backlight LCD)
PV display part : 7 Segment 5 digit (character size : W4×H8mm)
Display method Parameter display part : 14 Segment 8 digit (character size : W2.6×H4.8mm)
52 Bar meter
Display range -19999 to 99999
Setting method HART-protocol (no setting key)
Response time 1 sec.
DPt100Ω, DPt500Ω, DPt1000Ω,
RTD Ni100Ω, Ni500Ω, Ni1000Ω,
Cu50Ω, Cu100Ω
Thermocouple K, J, T, E, N, S, B, R
Input type
Resistance tran. 0 to 400 Ω,

(Ω) 0 to 2000 Ω
10-75 mV
Voltage trans. 100-100 mV
(mV) 100-500 mV
100-2000 mV
Output 4-20 mA(2-wire)
Below 3.8 mA, Over 20.5 mA
Alarm
Sensor break 3.6mA
Load max.(V power supply - 7.5V)/0.22A
Galvanic insulation 2KVAC(input/output)
Environ- Ambient temperature -20 to 70 ℃, storage: 20 to 80 ℃

ment Ambient humidity 0 to 85%RH
Explosion-proof structure Ex d IIC T6(IP67)
Material Body : Aluminum(AlDc.8S), Cover O-Ring : Buna N
Unit weight Approx. 1.2 kg
※Environment resistance is rated at no freezing or condensation.
G-2
Intelligent Temperature Transmitter
83 142
(unit:mm) B. Indicator
C. Converter
Ø83
96
D. Controller
2-(1/2 14NPT) E. Thyristor

55 unit
● Mounting bracket F. Pressure

215 transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
96
H. Accessories
200
(2-Pipe)
DN50
Mounting bracket
94
Input type and range Connections

KT-502H
Input type Input range(℃) Input range(℉) Indicator

Recorder
DPt100Ω 200 to 850 328 to 1562 DCS
Controller
DPt500Ω 200 to 250 328 to 482
Power
DPt1000Ω 200 to 250 328 to 482 Supply
Cu50Ω 50 to 150 58 to 302
RTD
Cu100Ω 50 to 150 58 to 302 HART Communicator
Ni100Ω 60 to 180 76 to 356

Ni500Ω 60 to 180 76 to 356 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ni1000Ω 60 to 150 76 to 302

Resistance Resistance 0 to 400Ω
(Resistance A B b
transmitter) (Ω) 0 to 2000Ω
RTD
B - +
0 to 1820 32 to 3308
(PtRh30-PtRh6) mV SOURCE
E(NiCr-CuNi) 270 to 1000 454 to 1832 + - 10.5-45VDC
J(Fe-CuNi) 210 to 1200 346 to 2192 TC

+ -
K(NiCr-Ni) 270 to 1372 454 to 2501
Thermocouple
N(NiCrSi-NiSi) 270 to 1300 454 to 2372
● Mounting bracket
R(PtRh13-Pt) 50 to 1768 58 to 3214.4
S(PtRh10-Pt) 50 to 1768 58 to 3214.4
T(Cu-CuNi) 270 to 400 454 to 752
10 - 75mV
To open the cover,
100 - 100mV
Analog Voltage unscrew the M3 X 6L
100 - 500mV headless bolt using a 1.5
100 - 2000mV hexagon wrench and rotate
the cover.
G-3
KT-502H
Current Trim adjustment
① Select the '1. Device Setup' by , keys and press the ⑨ Press the (F4) key.
key.
Setting fid dev.
1. Device Setup output to 20mA
2. PV ABORT OK
3. PV Ao
4. PV LRV
5. URV ⑩ Press the (F4) key to set 20 mA display value.
Enter meter Value

② Select the '2. Diag/Service' by , keys and press the 20.000
key. HELP DEL ABORT ENTER
1. Process Variables
2. Diag/Service ⑪ If output display value is correct, select '1. Yes' and press
3. Basic Setup the (F4) key. If not, select '2. No' and press the
4. Detailed Setup (F4) key and re-set the display value.
5. Review
③ Select the '4. D/A trim' by , keys and press the key. meter ?
1. Yes
1. Test device
2. Loop test 2. No ABORT ENTER
3. Calibration
4. D/A trim
⑫ Press the (F4) key.
④ Press the (F4) key. NOTE-Loop may be

returned to automatic
WARN-Loop should be control
removed from ABORT OK
automatic control
ABORT OK
⑬ Press the (F3) key.
Diag/Service
⑤ Press the (F4) key.
1. Test device
Connect reference 2. Loop test
meter 3. Calibration
ABORT OK 4. D/A trim
HELP SAVE HOME
⑥ Press the (F4) key.

⑭ Press the (F3) key.
Setting fid dev
output to 4mA Device Disconnected
ABORT OK RETRY QUIT
⑮ Press the (F3) key to complete the adjustment.

⑦ Press the (F4) key to set 4 mA display value.
1. Offline
Enter meter Value 2. Online
4.000 3. Frequency Device
HELP DEL ABORT ENTER 4. Utility
⑧ If output display value is correct, select '1. Yes' and press

Ex)If output display value is 3.89mA, select3.89 and press
the (F4) key.

meter ?
1. Yes
2. No ABORT ENTER
G-4
Intelligent Temperature Transmitter
Temperature range setting Proper usage A. Recorder
① Press the key for 3 sec. Caution for using

B. Indicator
Select the '4. PV LRV' by , keys and press the key.
Online (Generic) (M3.5, min. 7.2 mm). C. Converter
1. Device Setup • The connection of this unit should be separated from
2. PV the power line and high voltage line in order to prevent
3. PV Ao inductive noise. D. Controller
4. PV LRV • Install a power switch or a circuit breaker to supply or

5. URV SAVE cut off the power. E. Thyristor
unit
② Select '1. PV LRV'(Low temperature range) and users for convenient control. F. Pressure
press the key. • Do not use this unit near the high frequency instruments transmitter
1. PV LRV (high frequency welding machine & sewing machine,

G. Temp.
2. URV large capacity SCR controller). transmitter
HELP HOME • Installation environment.
① Indoor / Outdoor H. Accessories
③ Set Low temperature range and press the (F4) key. ② Altitude max. 2,000 m
③ Pollution degree 2
PV LRV ④ Installation category Ⅱ
0.000 deg C
0.000
HELP DEL ESC ENTER
④ Select '2. URV'(High temperature range) and

press the key.
1. PV LRV
2. URV
HELP HOME
KT-502H
⑤ Set High temperature range and press the (F4) key.
PV URV
100.000 deg C
100.000
HELP DEL ESC ENTER
⑥ When the set temperaure range is correct,

press the (F2) key.
1. PV LRV 0.000 deg C

2. URV 100.000 deg C
HELP SEND HOME
⑦ Press the (F4) key.
- WARNING -
Pressing ' OK ' will
change device output
put 100P in manual
⑧ Press the (F4) key.
- WARNING -
Return control 100P
To automatic control
OK
⑨ Check the set temperature range. Press the (F3)

key. HART communication is OFF.
1. PV LRV 0.000 deg C

2. URV 100.000 deg C
HELP HOME
G-5
SS-AD Series
Features
• Used to connect different types or diameters of

screws or pipes
• Variable specifications for sizes and applications
• Applications :
· Connecting different types or diameters of screws
or pipes
· Mounting a pressure gauge on a panel
· Connecting pressure pipes
Specifications
Series SS-AD
Brass Stainless steel
Body BSBM SUS316

Material
Packing(Gasket-Outlet) Teflon Teflon
Washer BSBM SUS316
· PF(Male) x PF(Male)
· PF(Male) x PT(Female)
Type
· PT(Female) x PF(Male)
· PT(Female) x PT(Female)
Dimensions
(unit: mm)
Con'n Con'n
Model A×B Hex k f L e
(d1) (d)
PF1/4 PF1/4 19×21.9 18 16 34 2
PF1/4 PF3/8 19×21.9 18 18 36 2
PF1/4 PF1/2 22×25.4 18 20 38 2
PF3/8 PF1/4 22×25.4 20 16 36 2
SS-AD01
PF3/8 PF3/8 22×25.4 20 18 38 2
(PF)×(PF)
PF3/8 PF1/2 22×25.4 20 20 40 2
PF1/2 PF1/4 27×31.1 22 16 38 2
PF1/2 PF3/8 27×31.1 22 18 40 2
PF1/2 PF1/2 27×31.1 22 20 42 2
Con'n Con'n
Model A×B Hex k f L a
(d1) (d)
PF1/4 PT1/4 19×21.9 18 14 32 6.01
PF1/4 PT3/8 19×21.9 18 16 34 6.35
PF1/4 PT1/2 22×25.4 18 18 36 8.16
PF3/8 PT1/4 22×25.4 20 14 34 6.01
SS-AD02
PF3/8 PT3/8 22×25.4 20 16 36 6.35
(PF)×(PT)
PF3/8 PT1/2 22×25.4 20 18 36 8.16
PF1/2 PT1/4 27×31.1 22 14 36 6.01
PF1/2 PT3/8 27×31.1 22 16 38 6.35
PF1/2 PT1/2 27×31.1 22 18 40 8.16
H-2
Adapter
(unit: mm)
A. Recorder
Con'n Con'n
(d1) (d) B. Indicator
PT1/4 PF1/4 19×21.9 16 16 32 2

PT1/4 PF3/8 19×21.9 16 18 34 2 C. Converter
PT1/4 PF1/2 22×25.4 16 20 36 2

PT3/8 PF1/4 22×25.4 18 16 34 2 D. Controller
SS-AD03
PT3/8 PF3/8 22×25.4 18 18 36 2
(PT)×(PF)
PT3/8 PF1/2 22×25.4 18 20 38 2 E. Thyristor
unit
PT1/2 PF1/4 27×31.1 20 16 36 2
PT1/2 PF3/8 27×31.1 20 18 38 2 F. Pressure
transmitter
PT1/2 PF1/2 27×31.1 20 20 40 2
G. Temp.
transmitter
H. Accessories
Con'n Con'n
(d1) (d)
PT1/4 PT1/4 19×21.9 16 14 30 6.01
PT1/4 PT3/8 19×21.9 16 16 32 6.35
PT1/4 PT1/2 22×25.4 16 18 34 8.16
PT3/8 PT1/4 22×25.4 18 14 32 6.01
SS-AD04
PT3/8 PT3/8 22×25.4 18 16 34 6.35
(PT)×(PT)
PT3/8 PT1/2 22×25.4 18 18 36 8.16
PT1/2 PT1/4 27×31.1 20 14 34 6.01
PT1/2 PT3/8 27×31.1 20 16 36 6.35
PT1/2 PT1/2 27×31.1 20 18 38 8.16
SS-AD
Con'n Con'n
Model A×B Hex f g L e e1
(d1) (d)
PF1/4 PF1/4 19×21.9 16 16 44 2 2
PF1/4 PF3/8 19×21.9 16 18 46 2 2
PF1/4 PF1/2 22×25.4 16 20 48 2 2
PF3/8 PF1/4 19×21.9 18 16 46 2 2
SS-AD05
PF3/8 PF3/8 19×21.9 18 18 48 2 2
(PF)×(PF)
PF3/8 PF1/2 22×25.4 18 20 50 2 2
PF1/2 PF1/4 22×25.4 20 16 48 2 2
PF1/2 PF3/8 22×25.4 20 18 50 2 2
PF1/2 PF1/2 22×25.4 20 20 52 2 2
Con'n Con'n
Model A×B Hex f g L e a
(d1) (d)
PF1/4 PT1/4 19×21.9 16 14 42 2 6.01
PF1/4 PT3/8 19×21.9 16 16 44 2 6.35
PF1/4 PT1/2 22×25.4 16 18 46 2 8.16
PF3/8 PT1/4 19×21.9 18 14 44 2 6.01
SS-AD06
PF3/8 PT3/8 19×21.9 18 16 46 2 6.35
(PF)×(PT)
PF3/8 PT1/2 22×25.4 18 18 48 2 8.16
PF1/2 PT1/4 22×25.4 20 14 46 2 6.01
PF1/2 PT3/8 22×25.4 20 16 48 2 6.35
PF1/2 PT1/2 22×25.4 20 18 50 2 8.16
H-3
SS-AD Series
(unit: mm)
Con'n Con'n
Model A×B Hex f g L a b
(d1) (d)
PT1/4 PT1/4 19×21.9 16 14 30 6.01 6.01
PT1/4 PT3/8 19×21.9 16 16 32 6.35 6.35
PT1/4 PT1/2 22×25.4 16 18 34 8.16 8.16
PT3/8 PT1/4 19×21.9 18 14 32 6.01 6.01
SS-AD07
PT3/8 PT3/8 19×21.9 18 16 34 6.35 6.35
(PT)×(PT)
PT3/8 PT1/2 22×25.4 18 18 36 8.16 8.16
PT1/2 PT1/4 22×25.4 20 14 34 6.01 6.01
PT1/2 PT3/8 22×25.4 20 16 36 6.35 6.35
PT1/2 PT1/2 22×25.4 20 18 38 8.16 8.16
Con'n Con'n
Model A×B Hex f g L
(d1) (d)
PF1/4 PF1/4 19×21.9 16 16 44
PF1/4 PF3/8 22×25.4 16 18 46
PF1/4 PF1/2 27×31.1 16 20 48
PF3/8 PF1/4 22×25.4 18 16 46
SS-AD08
PF3/8 PF3/8 22×25.4 18 18 48
(PF)×(PF)
PF3/8 PF1/2 27×31.1 18 20 50
PF1/2 PF1/4 27×31.1 20 16 48
PF1/2 PF3/8 27×31.1 20 18 50
PF1/2 PF1/2 27×31.1 20 20 52
Con'n Con'n
(d1) (d)
PF1/4 PT1/4 19×21.9 16 14 42
PF1/4 PT3/8 22×25.4 16 16 44
PF1/4 PT1/2 27×31.1 16 18 46
PF3/8 PT1/4 22×25.4 18 14 44
SS-AD09
PF3/8 PT3/8 22×25.4 18 16 46
(PF)×(PT)
PF3/8 PT1/2 27×31.1 18 18 48
PF1/2 PT1/4 27×31.1 20 14 46
PF1/2 PT3/8 27×31.1 20 16 48
PF1/2 PT1/2 27×31.1 20 18 50
Con'n Con'n
(d1) (d)
PF1/4 PT1/4 19×21.9 16 14 30
PF1/4 PT3/8 22×25.4 16 16 32
PF1/4 PT1/2 27×31.1 16 18 34
PF3/8 PT1/4 22×25.4 18 14 32
SS-AD10
PF3/8 PT3/8 22×25.4 18 16 34
(PT)×(PT)
PF3/8 PT1/2 27×31.1 18 18 36
PF1/2 PT1/4 27×31.1 20 14 34
PF1/2 PT3/8 27×31.1 20 16 36
PF1/2 PT1/2 27×31.1 20 18 38
H-4
Adapter
A. Recorder
B. Indicator
C. Converter
D. Controller
E. Thyristor
unit
F. Pressure
transmitter
G. Temp.
transmitter
H. Accessories
SS-AD
H-5

Automacao de Processos Catalogo

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Automacao de Processos Catalogo

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

www.autonics.

Integrated device management program(DAQMaster)

Item Minimum requirements

System IBM PC compatible computer with Intel Pentium Ⅲ or above

Operating system Microsoft Windows 98/NT/XP/Vista/7

Memory 256MB or more

Hard disk More than 1GB of free hard disk space

VGA 1024×768 or higher resolution display

Others RS-232 serial port(9-pin), USB port

Ordering information A. Recorder

Ordering information for recorder model B. Indicator

Ordering information for input/output card

Rear side of KRN100 standard model

1 to 6 Connects universal input card(KRN-UI2).

Connects digital input card(KRN-DI6), alarm output card(KRN-

C Connects communication output card(KRN-COM).

Universal input card [KRN-UI2] Digital input card [KRN-DI6]

※Each channel is isolated and dielectric strength is 500 V.

※AL1,2,3 and AL4,5,6 are isolated.

Transmitter power output card [KRN-24V3] Communication output card [KRN-COM]

※24V output of 3EA is isolated individually.

Protection IP40(for front panel)

Environ- Ambient temperature 0 to 50 ℃, storage: -20 to 60 ℃ (without ink cartridge)

※ Use a steel plate which is 2 to 8 mm thickness.

Alarm Capacity 25 0VAC, 3 A, 30 VDC 3 A, 1 Form A (resistance load)

Input type and range A. Recorder

Input range B. Indicator

J(IC) TC-J -200.0 to 800.0 -328.0 to 1472.0 73.2 to 1073.2

T(CC) TC-T -200.0 to 400.0 -328.0 to 752.0 73.2 to 673.2

※ 1. C(TT): Same as existing W5(TT) type sensor

<-Left Right-> Delete Cancel OK

④ ② Recording paper storage part

③ Front cover of recording paper storage

Special function [ Special Function ] ٧٧Linear

٧٧Two Unit Standard record period [ Standard Period ]

٧٧Single (single ON/OFF)

File/Memory setup [ FILE/MEMORY SETUP ]

٧٧Open parameter set file [ Load Set File ]

※ Be sure that if selecting ‘Default.pms’ file, every Firmware upgrade

Communication setting [COMMUNICATION SETUP ]

In case Input Type is analog(current, voltage), if input

Screen display change B. Indicator

Trend graph Bar graph

Special functions for record F. Pressure

Digital number (12-channel) Bar graph

Digital number (8-channel) Digital number (1-channel)

INPUT SETUP ALARM SETUP DIGITAL INPUT COMMUNICATION

Select UI Card Select UI Channel Select DI Card

Record Zone Alarm Option Stop Bit

OK, Alarm ON/OFF Delay

Special Func Subnet Mask

Ref Channel Ethernet Com Write

Input Bias USB Device Port

Span USB Com Write

RECORD SETUP SYSTEM SETUP FILE/MEMORY USER/INFORMATION RECORD BACKUP

Load Set File

Alarm Speed Sampling Rate

Input setting group [ INPUT SETUP ]

LCD/Paper Record ON Display/Temp • TC, RTD ℃ Two Unit - Filter Counter -

Record Zone None High/Low Low -200.0 Input Bias 0.0

Alarm setting group [ ALARM SETUP ]

Alarm1 Type ※1 PV.Hi Alarm1 Value ※1 1350.0 Alarm Alarm No ※1 None

Digital input setting group [ DIGITAL INPUT SETUP ]

※It is recommended to use SCM-WF48 (Wi-Fi to RS485,